COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM
CA-DXJ36
SUPER VIDEO
INSTRUCTIONS
GVT0245-001A
[US, UN, A, UG, UX]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front:
No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/Top/Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom:
Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing
on a stand with a height of 10 cm or more.
Front view
Side view
Wall or obstructions
Wall or obstructions
10 cm
10 cm
15 cm
10 cm
10 cm
CA-DXJ36
CA-DXJ36
10 cm
G-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Note on Region Code
Playable Disc/File Types
INFO
DVD players and DVD Video have their own Region Code
numbers. This System can play back only DVD Video with an
appropriate Region Code number.
• For details, see “Specifications” on page 47.
EX.: For Southeast Asia
COMPACT
SUPER VIDEO
DIGITAL VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO
Audio formats
The “√” in the list below shows available disc/file types.
The System can play back the following digital audio
formats.
Media type
Recording format
CD-R/ DVD-R/
USB mass
•
LPCM (Linear PCM),
DIGITAL (Dolby Digital),
*1
-RW
-RW, +R/ storage class
DTS (Digital Theater Systems), MPEG Audio, MLP
(Meridian Lossless Packing)
*2
+RW
—
—
√
device
CD-DA (normal CD)
VCD/SVCD
DVD Video
DVD Audio
DVD-VR
√
√
—
—
—
—
—
How to Read This Manual
• Button and control operations are explained in the table
below.
—
√
—
*3
√
—
•
Some related tips and notes are explained later in the
sections “Learning More about This System” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section
Audio file:
MP3/WMA/WAV
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Video file:
MPEG-1/MPEG-2/
ASF/DivX
explaining the operations (
indicates that the
INFO
content has some information).
Indicates that you press the button briefly.
Still picture file:
JPEG
Indicates that you press the button briefly
and repeatedly until an option you want is
selected.
*1 Recorded with “ISO 9660” format.
*2 Recorded with “UDF-Bridge” format.
*3 Not applicable for +R/+RW.
In addition to the above discs/files, this System can play
back audio data recorded on CD-Extra and DVD/CD Text.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD-RAM, CD-I (CD-I Ready) and Photo CD.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage
the speakers.
Indicates that you press one of the buttons.
Indicates that you press and hold the button
for a specified period.
The number inside the arrow indicates the
period of a press (in the example, 2 seconds).
2sec.
• DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used
for AV file operations.
Indicates that you turn the control toward the
specified direction(s).
• It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (DVD Video
format only) discs.
Caution for DualDisc playback:
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the remote control.
Remote
ONLY
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the main unit.
Main Unit
ONLY
About color system
This System accommodates both NTSC and PAL system
and can play back discs/files recorded in either system.
To change the color system, see page 6.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions
Contents
Connections....................................................................................3
Connecting a USB Mass Storage Class Device..........................6
Preparing the Remote Control ....................................................6
Cancelling the Demonstration ....................................................6
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode.......................6
Display Indication .........................................................................7
Daily Operations—Playback........................................................8
Adjusting the Volume.................................................................9
Listening to the Radio.................................................................9
Playing Back a Disc/USB Mass Storage Class Device ............10
Playing Back a Tape .................................................................12
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments.......................13
Adjusting the Speaker Output Level ........................................13
Reinforcing the Bass Sound......................................................13
Applying an Optimal Bass Sound Effect—VARIO BASS ......14
Selecting the Sound Modes.......................................................14
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode......................14
Selecting the Surround Modes .................................................15
Presetting Automatic DVD Video
Installation
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to
prevent internal heat build-up in the System.
DO NOT install the System in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor
too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference
with the TV.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always
pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Sound Increase Level............................................................15
Changing the Picture Tone .......................................................15
Changing the Display Brightness .............................................16
Setting the Clock.......................................................................16
Unique Video Disc/File Operations ...........................................17
Selecting the Audio Track ........................................................17
Selecting the Subtitle Language ...............................................18
Selecting the View Angle .........................................................18
Reviewing the Playback Quickly..............................................18
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures............................................18
Playing Back Bonus Group.......................................................19
Special Picture Playback...........................................................19
Advanced Playback Operations.................................................20
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play.....................20
Playing at Random—Random Play..........................................21
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play............................................22
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock....................................22
On-Screen Operations ................................................................23
On-screen Bar Information.......................................................23
Operations Using the On-screen Bar ........................................24
Operations Using the Control Screen .......................................27
Recording Operations.................................................................29
Recording onto a Tape..............................................................29
Dubbing Tapes..........................................................................30
Synchronized Recording...........................................................30
Enjoying Karaoke .......................................................................31
Singing Along (Karaoke)..........................................................31
Adjusting the Sound Track for Karaoke...................................32
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill......................................................32
Changing the Karaoke Setting..................................................33
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play ................34
Timer Operations........................................................................35
Setting the Timer ......................................................................35
Turning Off the Power Automatically......................................36
Timer Priority ...........................................................................36
Setup Menu Operations..............................................................37
Operating the TV ........................................................................39
Additional Information...............................................................40
Learning More about This System............................................40
Maintenance..............................................................................44
Troubleshooting........................................................................44
Language Code List..................................................................46
Specifications............................................................................47
Parts Index ..................................................................................48
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with
wet hands.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense in the lenses on the System in the
following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm
place.
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case,
leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture
evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Internal heat
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the System.
Poor ventilation could overheat and damage the System.
–A cooling fan is inside the System to prevent heat
build-up.
DO NOT block the ventilation openings or
holes. If they are blocked by a newspaper or
cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System,
unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before
operating any further.
DO NOT disassemble the System since there
are no user serviceable parts inside.
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended
period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall
outlet.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and
consult your dealer.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Do not connect the AC power cord until all other
connections have been made.
Supplied accessories
• FM antenna (x1)
• AM loop antenna (x1)
• Composite video cord (x1)
• Remote control (x1)
• Batteries (x2)
• AC plug adapter (x1)
(not supplied for Australia, Thailand and the Middle
East.)
• Connect VIDEO OUT directly to the video input of your
TV. Connecting VIDEO OUT to a TV via a VCR may
interfere with your viewing when playing back a copy-
protected source. Connecting VIDEO OUT to an integrated
TV/VCR system may interfere with your viewing.
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
~ From the video input of TV/monitor
See page 4.
Ÿ From AM/FM antenna
See page 4.
! From the powered subwoofer
See page 4.
⁄ From the speakers
See page 5.
@ From the analog audio output of auxiliary
equipment (VCR, etc.)
See page 5.
¤ Voltage selector
(not applicable for Australian models)
Before plugging in, confirm the position the
voltage selector points at. See page 5.
# To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all
connections are complete.
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug,
use the supplied AC plug adapter (not
supplied for Australia, Thailand and the
Middle East models).
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For better FM reception
~ TV/monitor
Composite video
cord (supplied)
S-Video cord
(not supplied)
FM outdoor antenna
(not supplied)
Green
Component video cord (not supplied)
Red
Blue
• Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect an
outdoor FM antenna using a 75 Ω wire with coaxial type
connector (IEC or DIN45325).
• To select progressive scanning mode (see page 6), use
COMPONENT jacks.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords or the power cord. Also, keep
the antennas away from metallic parts of the System,
connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause
poor reception.
• Connect the VIDEO jack, S-VIDEO jack, or
COMPONENT jacks; whichever you want to use.
• You can get better picture quality in the order—
Composite video
]
S-Video
]
Component video.
Ÿ AM/FM antenna
To assemble the AM loop antenna
! Powered subwoofer
Audio Cord
(not supplied)
From the powered
subwoofer (not supplied)
To connect AM/FM antenna
• If the antenna cord is covered with vinyl on the tip, twist and
pull the vinyl off to remove.
• Before plugging the powered subwoofer to the main unit,
make sure that the powered subwoofer is turned off or at
minimum volume.
• The subwoofer output level varies follow to the System
master volume.
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn until the best reception is
obtained.
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain the best
reception.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
⁄ Speakers
Speaker layout
To enjoy multi-channel sound, locate the speakers as
follows. If you cannot locate like this, adjust the speaker
setting by using the SPK. SETTING menu (see page 38).
To connect the speaker cords
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
Center speaker
Release
Press and hold
Insert
• When connecting the speaker cords, match their polarity
with that of the speaker terminals: red/grey/green to (+) and
black to (–).
From surround right
speaker (grey/black)
From surround left
speaker (grey/black)
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
From center speaker
(green/black)
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to
each terminal.
• DO NOT push or pull the speakers as this
will damage the foot spacers at the bottom
of the speakers.
From front left speaker
(red/black)
@ Auxiliary equipment
From front right speaker
(red/black)
Red
Stereo audio cord
• Use only speakers with the same speaker impedance as
indicated by the speaker terminals on the rear of the System.
• The front speakers and center speaker are magnetically
shielded to avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not
installed properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay
attention to the following when installing the speakers.
– When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the
speakers.
(not supplied)
White
¤ Voltage selector
Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s
main power switch again.
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have
followed the above instruction. If this happens, move the
speakers away from the TV.
(Not applicable for Australian model)
Use a screwdriver to rotate the
voltage selector so that the voltage
mark is pointing to the same
voltage as where you are plugging
in the unit. (See also the back cover
page.)
Voltage mark
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
# Power cord
Cancelling the Demonstration
Main Unit
ONLY
Plug the AC power cord to a wall outlet.
2
sec.
DO NOT plug in before setting the voltage
DEMO OFF
DEMO START
selector and all connection procedures are
completed.
Connecting a USB Mass Storage Class Device
You can connect a USB mass storage class device such as a
USB flash memory, hard disk drive, multimedia card reader,
digital camera, etc. to this System.
To start the demonstration, select DEMO START.
Changing the Color System and
USB cable
(not supplied)
Remote
ONLY
Scanning Mode
INFO
You can select the video output to match it to the color
system of your TV (NTSC or PAL).
• If you connect a progressive TV through the
COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture
by selecting progressive scanning mode.
Main unit
• You cannot connect a personal computer to the
MEMORY) terminal of the System.
• When connecting with a USB cable, use the USB 2.0 cable
whose length is less than 1m.
(USB
• You can change the setting only while playback is stopped.
1 Enter the color system setting mode.
2
sec.
Preparing the Remote Control
SCAN MODE
Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the
polarrrity (+ and –) correctly.
2 Select the color system and scanning mode.
PAL PROG
PAL
NTSC PROG
NTSC
NTSC / PAL
NTSC or PAL Interlaced
scanning. For a conventional
NTSC or PAL TV.
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
NTSC PROG/
PAL PROG
NTSC or PAL Progressive
scanning. For a progressive NTSC
or PAL TV.
When using the remote control, point the top of the
remote control toward the remote sensor as directly as
possible. If you operate it from a diagonal position, the
operating range (approx. 5 m) may be shorter.
• If the range of effectiveness of the remote control decreases,
replace both batteries.
3 Store the setting.
Caution:
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or the like.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Indication
The indications on the display tell you a lot of things while you are operating the System.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
e
r
t
y
1 Source signal indicators
• DTS: lights when DTS signals are detected.
DIGITAL: lights when Dolby Digital signals are
detected.
2 Karaoke operation indicators
9 Timer indicators
•
: lights when Daily Timer or Recording Timer is on
standby, is working, or being set.
•
• SLEEP: lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
• DAILY: lights when the Daily Timer is on standby;
flashes while working or being set.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer is on standby;
flashes while working or being set.
/
/
•
: lights when Mic Mixing is activated; flashes
when Karaoke Scoring is in use.
• ECHO: lights when Echo is activated.
• V.MASKING: lights when Vocal Masking is activated.
3 PROGRESSIVE indicator
• Lights when the progressive scanning mode is selected.
4 B.S.P. indicator
p Repeat mode indicators
•
P: lights when Repeat Play is activated.
• ALL: lights when All File Repeat is activated (only for
USB)
• Lights when browsable still pictures on DVD Audio are
available.
5 BONUS indicator
• Lights when DVD Audio with bonus group is detected.
6 Disc indicators
• ALL DISC: lights when All Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1 DISC: lights when One Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1: lights when One Track/Chapter/File/Step Repeat is
activated.
q Play mode indicators
• 1 – 5: lights to indicate the current disc tray.
• PROGRAM: lights when Program Play is activated.
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
w PG/PL indicator
•
: lights when a disc is detected on the disc tray; rotates
during playback or pause.
7 FM reception indicators
• PG: lights when Original Program is selected for
DVD-VR playback.
• PL: lights when Play List is selected for DVD-VR
playback.
e Sound Mode/Surround Mode indicators
• S.MODE: lights when one of the Sound Modes is
activated.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with
sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in
monaural.
8 Tape operation indicators
• TAPE: lights when a tape is loaded in either deck A or B.
•
(Reverse Mode): indicates the current Reverse
Mode.
•
: lights when one of the Surround Modes
is activated.
• A: lights when a tape is in deck A.
• B: lights when a tape is in deck B.
r Dolby Pro Logic II mode indicator
• Lights when Dolby Pro Logic II (Movie or Music) is
activated.
t Main display
y USB indicator
•
2*
3
(tape direction):
– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
*2 indicator for deck A is available only when the
tape is being rewinded.
• Lights when “USB” is selected as the source.
• REC: lights while recording.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Playback
¥ Turn on the power.
In this manual, the operations using the remote control
The STANDBY Led on the main unit goes off.
are mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons
and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or
similar) name and marks.
• Without pressing
AUDIO, the System also turns
on by pressing one of the source selecting buttons in
the next step.
ø Select the source.
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is
ready to start playback.
• To listen to the sound of the external component, press
FM/AM/AUX repeatedly to select “AUX” as the
source, then start playback on the external component.
1
Number
DISC 1–
DISC 5
π Adjust the volume.
RETURN
buttons
CANCEL
To turn off (standby) the System
TOP MENU/PG
MENU/PL
The STANDBY Led on the main unit
lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always
consumed even while on standby.
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
2
FM/PLAY
MODE,
REVERSE MODE
For private listening
,
GROUP/TITLE
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the
speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before
connecting or putting on the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the
speakers again.
,
PREV.,
NEXT,
FADE MUTING
SHIFT
3
DO NOT turn off (standby) the System with
the volume set to an extremely high level;
otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can
damage your hearing, speakers and/or
headphones when you turn on the System or
start playback.
1
2
How to select a number
To select 5, press 5.
To select 10, press 10.
To select 15, press 10, 1, then 5.
To select 30, press 10, 3, then 0.
To select 125, press 10, 10, 1,
2, then 5.
3
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
Adjusting the Volume
The volume level can be adjusted in 32 steps (VOLUME
MIN, VOLUME 1 – VOLUME 30, and VOLUME MAX).
1
sec.
Increases the frequency.
Decreases the frequency.
Remote control:
Main unit:
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is
tuned in, the frequency search stops.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency
changes step by step.
To manually stop the searching, press either button.
Remote
ONLY
To drop the volume in a moment
To restore the volume,
press again or adjust the
volume level.
Remote
ONLY
If the FM reception is poor
The MONO indicator lights on the
display. Reception will improve though
stereo effect is lost—monaural reception
mode.
To restore the stereo effect, press the
button again (the MONO indicator goes
off).
(while holding...)
Listening to the Radio
INFO
To select the AM tuner interval spacing
Main Unit
ONLY
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other
countries use 10 kHz spacing.
Remote
ONLY
To preset stations
1 Select “TUNER AM,” then turn off (standby) the
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
System.
1 Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM
preset stations if selected.
TUNER FM
TUNER AM
AUX
2 Activate the preset number entry mode.
2 Select the AM tuner interval spacing.
To select 9 kHz:
• Finish the following process while the indication on the
display is flashing.
• To cancel the operation during procedure, press
CANCEL while holding SHIFT.
(while holding...)
3 Select a preset number for the station you store.
To select 10 kHz:
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
• You can also use ¢/4 buttons.
(while holding...)
To select the band (FM/AM)
TUNER FM
TUNER AM
AUX
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Store the station.
To connect a USB mass storage class device
USB cable
(not supplied)
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
• Always set the volume to the minimum level when
connecting or disconnecting the USB mass storage class
device.
• To disconnect the USB mass storage class device safely,
turn off the System before disconnecting the device.
TUNER FM
TUNER AM
AUX
2 Select the preset number for the station you stored.
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
To play back disc/USB mass storage class
device
• You can also use ¢/4
buttons.
To start:
USB mass storage class device
Disc
Playback starts.
Playing Back a Disc/USB Mass Storage
To pause:
To stop:
Class Device
INFO
To release it, press
DVD/CD 3 or
•
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc/USB mass
USB MEMORY 3.
storage class device, make sure of the following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on
the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays.
• For disc/USB mass storage class device playback, you
can change the initial setting to your preference. See
“Setup Menu Operations” on page 37.
While playing, this System can store the stop point (not
applicable for CD). When you start playback again by
pressing DVD/CD 3 or USB MEMORY 3, it starts from
the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.
(“RESUME” appears when you stop playback.)
If “
” appears on the TV screen when you press a
button, the disc/USB mass storage class device cannot
perform the operation you have tried to do.
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press 7
twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 38.)
• For playback of AV files, see also “Operations Using the
Control Screen” on page 27.
On-screen guide icons
• During playback, the following icons may appear for a
while on the TV screen:
To insert discs
Appears at the beginning of a scene
containing multi-angle views.
Appears at the beginning of a scene
containing multi-audio languages.
Appears at the beginning of a scene
containing multi-subtitle languages.
• The following icons will also be shown on the TV screen
to indicate your current operation.
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the
disc tray.
To close the disc tray, press the same 0 button again.
• If you press # for the same tray, the disc tray closes and
playback starts automatically.
,
,
,
,
,
• To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” in “OTHERS” menu on page 38.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For DivX files, each time you press the or button, you
can skip to a scene of 30 seconds or 5 minutes away
depending on the DivX file.
To select a disc
Playback
starts.
(while holding...)
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3.
Remote
ONLY
To select a title/group
While playing...
Remote
ONLY
T
o select an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start
playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting
playback, while you can select a chapter after starting
(while holding...)
playback
.
• To select a number, see “How to select a number” on
page 8.
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
To select a chapter/track
While playing...
or
Remote
ONLY
To play back by using the disc menu
You can operate the disc play using the disc menu.
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio
1 Show the disc menu.
• The first time you press 4, you will go back to the
beginning of the current chapter/track.
• To select a number, see “How to select a number” on
page 8.
or
To locate a particular portion
• This does not function for JPEG files.
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
While playing...
• On some discs, you can also select items by entering the
number using the number buttons. To select a number, see
“How to select a number” on page 8.
• Search speed changes as above for all discs/files except for
MP3/WMA/WAV/DivX files. For MP3/WMA/WAV/
DivX files, search speed is different.
• No sound comes out if searching is carried out while
showing the moving picture.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 For SVCD/VCD with PBC
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the
display instead of the playing time.
To start playback:
To stop:
When disc menu appears on the TV screen, select an item on
the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
To rewind or fast-forward tape:
To change the tape running direction
(deck B only)
To move to the next or
previous page of the
current menu:
To return to the previous
menu:
3 (forward
2 (reverse
)
)
To reverse the tape automatically
(deck B only)
(while holding...)
To cancel PBC, press 7, then press ¢.
• You can also cancel PBC by pressing 7, then pressing the
number buttons. Playback starts with the selected track.
To reactivate PBC, press 7, then press 4.
Tape is reversed, and playback repeats until
you stop it.
Tape is not reversed. When the current side of
the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Playing Back a Tape
Tape is reversed once.
To insert a tape
You can play back type I tapes.
• The use of C-120 or longer tapes is not recommended.
Ex.: When using deck B.
Insert
Push
Close
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
Adjusting the Speaker Output Level
Remote Control
Remote
ONLY
INFO
You can adjust the speaker output level from –6 (dB) to
+6 (dB). Initial setting: +4 (dB).
• You can also use the setup menu to adjust the speaker
output level (see page 38).
• The function is not available when the surround mode is set
to “STEREO” or Mic Mixing is activated.
CLOCK/TIMER
DIMMER
1 Select the speaker you want to adjust.
(Front left
speaker)
(Front right
speaker)
CANCEL
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
FRONT L
FRONT R
DISPLAY
CENTER
(Center speaker)
(while holding...)
CH. LEVEL,
SURR R
(Surround right
speaker)
SURR L
SOUND MODE
VFP
(Surround left
speaker)
SURR MODE
SHIFT
ACTIVE BASS
EXT LEVEL
+, –
2 Adjust the output level while the display is showing
DVD LEVEL,
VARIO BASS
speaker name.
Main unit
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust other speakers.
Reinforcing the Bass Sound
INFO
You can adjust the Active Bass level from level 1
(minimum) to level 4 (maximum).
VARIO BASS
Initial setting: 4
• This function is not available when VARIO BASS is set to
ACTIVE BASS
EX. +,–
“OFF” or headphones are plugged in.
SOUND MODE
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applying an Optimal Bass Sound Effect
—VARIO BASS
Creating Your Own Sound
Modes—User Mode
INFO
Remote
ONLY
INFO
You can adjust bass sound characteristics to create a sound
suitable for the playback source to your preference.
You can adjust the preset Sound Modes to create your own
Sound Modes which suit your taste. The changed settings can
be stored as the USER1, USER2 and USER3 Modes.
AUTO
OFF
LITE.n.EASY
MOVIE
(Initial setting) (Canceled)
While “USER1,” “USER2” or “USER3” is shown on the
display...
TURBO TECHNO
1
AUTO
The System automatically applies
TURBO, LITE.n.EASY, MOVIE or
TECHNO according to the playback
source (initial setting).
LITE.n.EASY
MOVIE
Suitable for Karaoke and classical
music. You can obtain a comfortable
bass sound.
2 Select the SEA parameter you want to adjust.
1 Adjust BASS.
2 Adjust MID (Mid-range).
3 Adjust TRE (Treble).
Suitable for a video source and playback
of external component. You can obtain a
strong bass sound.
TECHNO
TURBO
Suitable for disco or techno music and
playback of cassette tape. You can
obtain a strong bouncy bass sound.
Suitable for most kinds of music and
playback of external component. You
can obtain a balanced bass sound.
3 Adjust the parameter.
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Sound Modes
You can select one of the preset Sound Modes—SEA
(Sound Effect Amplifier) mode.
ROCK
POP
CLASSIC
FLAT
(Canceled)
USER1–3
• You can adjust the bass, mid and treble level from –3 to
+3.
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other parameters.
4 Select one of the User Modes.
ROCK
Boosts low and high frequency. Good for
acoustic music (initial setting).
POP
Good for vocal music.
USER1
USER2
CLASSIC
USER1/2/3
Good for classical music.
USER3
Your individual mode stored in memory.
See the next column “Creating Your Own
Sound Modes—User Mode.”
5 Store the setting.
• While one of the Sound Modes is activated, S.MODE
indicator lights up.
To cancel the Sound Mode, select “FLAT.”
• You can adjust the SEA pattern temporarily by doing the
operations in steps 1 to 3.
The adjustment is cleared when you change the sound
mode to another mode.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• While one of the Surround Modes is activated,
” lights up.
Selecting the Surround Modes
INFO
“
• For “DVD/CD” and “USB” (multi-channel software):
*1 Selectable Surround Mode varies depending on the
software.
*2 MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) and MUSIC (Dolby
Pro Logic II Music) cannot be used for DivX file.
1
*
DOLBY D/DTS/PPCM/LPCM
STEREO
AUTO
Initial setting: DOLBY D/DTS/PPCM/LPCM*1
• For “DVD/CD” and “USB” (stereo software):
Presetting Automatic DVD Video
Remote
ONLY
Sound Increase Level
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower
level than other discs and sources. You can set the increase
level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you do not
have to adjust the volume when you change the source.
• This function is available only for DVD Video discs.
Initial setting: ALL CH ST
• For “TUNER AM” and “TUNER FM”, “TAPE” and
“AUX”:
AUTO
ALL CH ST
STADIUM
DANCE
HALL
DVD LEVEL1
DVD LEVEL2
STEREO
Initial setting: ALL CH ST
(while holding...)
DVD LEVEL3
DSP Modes
ALL CH ST All Channel Stereo; Creates larger stereo
• As the number increases, sound level also increases.
• The initial setting is “DVD LEVEL3.”
sound field using all the connected speakers.
DANCE
HALL
Increases resonance and bass.
Adds depth and brilliance to the sound.
Remote
ONLY
STADIUM Adds clarity and spreads the sound, as in an
Changing the Picture Tone
outdoor stadium.
While viewing a playback picture on the TV, you can select
the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own
preference.
Stereo Mode
STEREO
Auto Surround Mode
AUTO The System automatically selects an
Cancels the Surround Mode.
To select a preset picture tone
appropriate Surround Mode or Stereo Mode
according to the incoming signals. For
example, a multi-channel source is
automatically reproduced in an appropriate
Multi-channel Surround Mode.
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
GAMMA
0
0
0
0
0
0
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
Multi channel Surround Modes*1
DOLBY D For multi-channel encoded Dolby Digital
source.
SHARPNESS
On the TV screen
DTS
PPCM
For multi-channel encoded DTS source.
For multi-channel encoded PPCM (Packed
PCM) source.
For multi-channel encoded LPCM (Linear
PCM) source.
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL
USER2
CINEMA
USER1
LPCM
Dolby Pro Logic II Modes
MOVIE
Creates 5.1-channel surround field from 2-
channel source (suitable for movie source).
Creates 5.1-channel surround field from 2-
channel source (suitable for music source).
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
MUSIC
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can
store the settings (see next page).
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the picture tone
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Clock
INFO
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
• Follow steps 1 and 2 on page 15.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use any timers
except the Sleep timer.
• To exit from the clock setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as
required.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL
while holding SHIFT. You can return to the previous step.
1 Activate clock setting mode.
GAMMA
Adjust if the neutral color is bright
or dark. The brightness of dark and
bright portions is maintained
(–3 to +3).
(while holding...)
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the picture is bright or dark
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the
button repeatedly until the clock time starts flashing.
as a whole (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST
Adjust if the far and near position is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
2 Adjust the hour, then minute.
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or
blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT
Adjust if the human skin color is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS
Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
Now the built-in clock starts working.
3 Adjust the parameter.
To display the clock during playback
For “DVD/CD” and “USB MEMORY”:
Disc/file type
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
To erase the VFP screen, press VFP again.
(while holding...)
Clock
Playback
information
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Display Brightness
DIMMER 1 DIMMER 2
For “TAPE,” “TUNER FM,” “TUNER AM” and “AUX”:
DIMMER OFF
(Canceled)
Current source
information
(while holding...)
(while holding...)
Clock
DIMMER 1
DIMMER 2
Dims the display.
Dims the display more than DIMMER 1.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unique Video Disc/File Operations
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Audio Track
INFO
Remote Control
For DVD Video/DivX: While playing back a chapter/file
containing audio languages, you can select the language to
listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing
audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For DVD-VR/SVCD/VCD: While playing back a chapter/
track, you can select the audio channel to play.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
Number
buttons
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
DVD/CD
,
SLOW/
While playing DVD Video...
SLOW
ZOOM,
/
ANGLE,
Ex.:
AUDIO MPX
SUB TITLE
PAGE
SHIFT
1/3
2/3
3/3
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
While playing a DVD Audio/DivX...
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
While playing a DVD-VR, SVCD or VCD...
SVCD
ST1
ST2
L2
L1
R2
R1
DVD-VR/VCD
ST
L
2
R
DVD-VR
1
ST1/ST2/ST To listen to normal stereo (2-channel)
playback.
L1/L2/L
R1/R2/R
To listen to the left audio channel.
To listen to the right audio channel.
* Example: when two multi-channel streams are recorded.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. SVCD usually uses
these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings (ST1/
ST2).
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Selecting the View Angle
For DVD Video/DVD Audio/DivX: While playing back a
chapter/file containing subtitles in different languages, you
can select the subtitle language to display on the TV screen.
For DVD-VR: While playing, you can turn the subtitle on or
off.
For DVD Video/DVD Audio only: While playing back a
chapter containing multi-view angles, you can view the same
scene from different angles.
• You can also select the view angle using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
For SVCD: While playing, the SUB TITLE button functions
even if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
• You can also select the subtitle language using the
on-screen bar (see page 24).
While playing...
While playing a DVD Video/DivX...
(while holding...)
1 Display the subtitle selection window.
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
2 Select the subtitle language.
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
Ex.:
Remote
ONLY
1/3
2/3
3/3
Reviewing the Playback Quickly
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
For DVD Video/DVD-VR only: You can move back the
playback position by 10 seconds (only within the same title/
program)—Glance Back.
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing...
While playing a DVD-VR...
Remote
ONLY
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
For DVD Audio only: While playing back a track linked to
browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), you can select the still
picture (turn the “page”) to be shown on the TV screen.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), they
are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
• You can also select the “page” using the on-screen bar (see
page 24).
While playing an SVCD...
Each time you press the
button, the still picture
(page) changes one after
another (if available).
(while holding...)
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3.
Remote
ONLY
Playing Back Bonus Group
INFO
For DVD Audio only: Some DVD Audio discs have a
special group called “bonus group” whose contents are not
open to the public.
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
Slow-motion playback
• This function is available only for moving picture files
except MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/DivX.
1 While playing...
1 Select the bonus group.
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a
bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group”
on page 11.
Still picture appears.
2 Start slow-motion playback.
2 Enter the key number.
*
1/32
1/32
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
3 Follow the interactive instruction shown on the TV
*Only for DVD Video.
screen.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
To cancel the key number entry, press 7.
Remote
ONLY
Special Picture Playback
INFO
Zoom
• For JPEG/ASF files, see page 28.
Still picture playback
While playing...
While playing...
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 6
ZOOM 3
ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
Still picture appears.
ZOOM OFF
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3.
(while holding...)
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
• You can move the zoomed-in area by pressing
,
,
,
.
Frame-by-frame playback
• This function is not available for ASF file.
1 While playing...
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly until
“ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV screen.
Playback pauses.
2 Advance the still picture frame by frame.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Playback Operations
Programming the Playing Order
Remote Control
Remote
ONLY
—Program Play
INFO
You can arrange the playing order of the chapters/tracks/
files (up to 99) before you start playback.
• Program Play cannot be used for files in a USB mass
storage class device, Video files/JPEG files on a disc and
DVD-VR.
Number
buttons
CANCEL
1 Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
,
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
DVD/CD
FM/PLAY
MODE,
,
REPEAT A-B,
REPEAT
On the display
SHIFT
PROGRAM
No Disc
1
Group/Title
Track/Chapter
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
On the TV screen
Main unit
2 Select chapters/tracks/files you want for Program
Play.
1 Select a disc number.
2 For DVDs and Audio files only: Select a group/title
number.
3 Select a track/chapter number.
• To select a number, see “How to select a number” on
page 8.
DVD/CD
3 Repeat step 2 above until you complete your program.
4 Start playback.
Playback starts in the order you have
programmed.
DISC 1
,
,
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To skip:
To pause:
To stop*:
Playing at Random—Random Play
You can play the contents of all the loaded discs at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for files in a USB mass
storage class device, Video files/JPEG files on a disc,
DVD-VR and some DVDs.
Torelease, press
DVD/CD 3.
1 Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
*Resume does not work for Program Play.
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
In the reverse order.
On the display
2 Start playback.
In the programmed order.
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
Playback of the current disc starts in a random order.
When all chapters/tracks on the current disc are played,
playback of the next disc starts. Random Play ends when
all loaded discs are played.
To erase the last step:
To erase the entire
program:
To skip:
To pause:
To stop:
(while holding...)
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2 on page 20.
To go to the
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
beginning of the
current chapter/
track, press 4.
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For Program Play:
While playing or before playback...
Remote
ONLY
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play
You can repeat playback.
P 1
P ALL
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar
(See page 25. Not applicable for AV files and JPEG file.)
• For Video file/JPEG file and DVD-VR, see page 28.
• The indicator(s) lights on the display as follows to indicate
the current repeat mode.
Canceled
P 1
Repeats the current chapter/track/file/step.
Repeats the current title/group/program.
Repeats the current disc.
P
Repeat Play
•
For DVD Video:
P 1 DISC*
While playing...
P ALL DISC* Repeats all discs.
P ALL Repeats all files in a USB mass storage
P 1
Canceled
class device or all programmed chapters/
tracks/files.
P ALL DISC
*These modes may not work correctly for DVDs.
•
For DVD Audio:
A-B Repeat
While playing or before playback...
You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying
the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).
• A-B Repeat cannot be used for AV files and some DVDs.
P 1
P ALL DISC
Canceled
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select
the start point (A).
•
For Audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV):
While playing or before playback...
–When repeating Audio files on disc:
P 1
P 1DISC
(while holding...)
Canceled
P ALL DISC
2 Select the end point (B).
–When repeating Audio files in a USB mass storage class
device:
(while holding...)
P 1
P
P ALL
• You can search for the end point using the ¡ button.
To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again.
• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or
skip the chapter or track.
Canceled
•
For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing or before playback (without PBC for SVCD/
VCD)...
Main Unit
ONLY
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock
You can lock the disc trays so that no one can eject the
loaded discs.
P 1
Canceled
P 1DISC
P ALL DISC
While on standby...
•
For Random Play:
While playing or before playback...
P 1
Canceled
P 1DISC
P ALL DISC
(while holding...)
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Operations
On-screen Bar Information
Remote control
You can check the playback information and use some
functions through the on-screen bar. (Not applicable for
Audio files and JPEG files.)
On-screen bars
DVD Video
Number
buttons
1
2
3
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
PG
PL
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
ON SCREEN
4
DVD Audio
DVD/CD
USB MEMORY
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
LPCM
DISC 2 GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:15:58
DVD-AUDIO
3/2.1ch
OFF
TRACK
PAGE
1/3
1/3
TIME
REPEAT
SHIFT
ZOOM
4
DVD-VR
1
2
Dolby D
2/0.0ch
DISC 1 PG
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 0:01:58
DVD-VR
TIME
OFF
ST
ON
4
SVCD
1
2
TRACK
TRACK
3
TIME
0:04:58
0:04:58
DISC
3
PROGRAM
SVCD
TIME
OFF
ST1
-/
4
4
VCD
1
2
DISC 4
3
TIME
VCD
TIME
PROGRAM
OFF
ST
4
CD
1
2
TRACK
3
TIME 0:04:58
DISC 5
PROGRAM
CD
TIME
OFF
4
Video file on a disc—MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/DivX file
1
5
2
3
REPEAT GROUP Time 00:00:58
FILE
Video file in a USB mass storage class device
—MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/DivX file
5
2
REPEAT GROUP Time 00:00:58
USB
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O
perations Using the
1 Disc type/source type
2 Playback information
Remote
ONLY
INFO
On-screen Bar
Basic operation procedures through the on-screen bar are as
follows:
Indication
Meanings
Dolby D/
DTS/ LPCM/
PPCM
Audio format
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video:
While a disc is selected as the source...
3/2.1 ch/
2/0.0 ch
Channel number
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
PROGRAM/ Current play mode
RANDOM
Dolby D
DISC 1 TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
DISC
TITLE
CHAP
1
Current disc
*
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/ 1
DVD-VIDEO
2
Current title
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
1/3
1/3
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
3
Disappears
GROUP
1
* This does not appear for Video files.
TRACK 14
2 Select (highlight) the item you want.
Current program
Current play list
Time indications
PG
PL
2
2
TOTAL1:25:58
3 Playback conditions
Indication
Meanings
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/ 1
Playback
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
/
/
Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
3 Display the pop-up window.
Pause
Stop
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
4 Operation icons (on the pull-down menu)
1/3
1/3 1/1
Indication
Meanings
ENGLISH
TIME
Select to change the time indication
(see also page 25).
4 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
Select to repeat playback (see also
pages 25).
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
Select for time search (see also
page 26).
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
CHAP.
TRACK
1/3
Select for chapter search (see also
page 26).
5 Finish the setting.
Select for track search (see also
page 26).
Pop-up window disappears.
Select to change the audio language or
channel (see also page 17).
Select to change subtitle language (see
also page 18).
1/3
To erase the on-screen bar, press ON SCREEN again.
Select to change view angle (see also
page 18).
1/3
Select to change the page (see also
page 18).
PAGE 1/15
5 Repeat Play setting for video files (See also page 28)
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar
and the display window on the main unit.
ALL
Repeats all discs or all programmed
tracks.
A-B
Repeats a desired portion (see below).
Repeats the current title.
Repeats the current group.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD).
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
TITLE
GROUP
DISC
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).
3 Change the time indication.
CHAPTER
TRACK*
PG
Repeats the current program (for
DVD-VR only). See also page 28.
PL
Repeats the current play list (for
DVD-VR only). See also page 28.
OFF
Cancels Repeat Play.
TOTAL
T. REM
TIME*
Elapsed disc time.
*During Program Play or Random Play, “STEP”
appears.
Remaining time of the current disc/title.
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track.
5 Finish the setting.
REM*
Remaining time of the current chapter/
track.
Pop-up window disappears.
*Not applicable for DVD-VR.
Repeat Play
A-B Repeat
• For Audio files, see also page 22.
• For Video files and JPEG file, see page 28.
1 While playing a disc, display the on-screen bar with
the pull-down menu.
2 Select
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• All discs except DVD: Repeat Play can be selected
before starting playback.
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
2 Select
3 Display the pop-up window.
.
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
OFF
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
4 Select “A-B.”
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
OFF
DISC
TIT
1
DVD-VIDEO
OFF
TIME
CHAP.
A–B
5 Select the start point (A).
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
H
C
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
A
-
CHAP.
1
/3
• After selecting the starting point (A), you can search for
the end point using ¡.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Select the end point (B).
A-B Repeat starts. The selected
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the number of the item to play.
For DVD Video/DVD-VR: Chapter
For DVD Audio: Track
portion plays repeatedly.
1 While playing a disc, display the on-screen bar with
the pull-down menu.
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3, and select “OFF”
in step 4.
CHAP.
TRACK
2 Select
or
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed
playing time from the beginning.
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
CHAPTER
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
_
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• All discs except DVD: Time Search can be used before
starting playback.
Examples:
To select 5, press 5.
To select 15, press 1, then 5.
To select 30, press 3, then 0.
2 Select
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
• To correct a misentry, press the number buttons until
the desired number is shown in the pop-up window.
4 Enter the time.
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
5 Finish the setting.
Examples:
To move to a point of 1 (hours):
02 (minutes): 00 (seconds), press
1, 0, 2, 0, then 0.
The System starts playing the
searched chapter or track.
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press 0,
5, 4, 0, then 0.
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0”
hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
last two digits in the examples above).
• To correct a misentry, press to erase the last entry.
5 Finish the setting.
The System starts playing from the
specified time.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control screen for AV files/JPEG files
Operations Using the Control
Screen
For DVD-VR, JPEG file and AV files: You can search for
and play the desired items through the control screen.
The control screen automatically appears on the TV screen
when the System detects Audio files on the loaded disc or
connected USB mass storage class device. (For Video files/
JPEG file; it appears when playback is stopped.)
Ex.: While playing an MP3 file on a disc.
Remote
ONLY
Control screen for DVD-VR
The control screen is superimposed on the TV screen when
you call up Original Program (PG) or Play List (PL) screens.
RANDOM
REPEAT STEP Time : 00:00:14
Group : 2 / 3
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
Blue
Red
Green
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
To select playback type
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
To select the Original
Program:
To select the Play List:
Track Information
Title
Rain
Artist
Album
Winter sky.mp3
1 Current source
FILE: Current source is “DVD/CD.”
USB: Current source is “USB.”
2 Current group number/total group number
3 Current group
4 Group list
5 Current file
6 File information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV file)
7 Play mode information (RANDOM or PROGRAM.
Not applicable for USB mass storage class device.)
8 Repeat Play setting
When Original Program screen is superimposed.
ORIGINAL PROGRAM
No Date
Ch
Time
Title
1 25/04/07 4ch 19:00
2 17/05/07 8ch 10:30
3 22/05/07 8ch 17:00
4 26/05/07 L-1 13:19
5 20/06/07 4ch 22:00
JVC DVD World 2004
Music Festival
children 001
6 25/06/07 L-1
8:23
children 002
9 Elapsed playing time of the current file
(Not applicable for JPEG file)
0 Operation Status icon
- Current file number/total number of files in the
current group (total number of files on the current
disc/USB mass storage class device)
= Highlight bar (Current selection)
~ File list
When Play List screen is superimposed.
PLAY LIST
No Date
Chap Length
Title
My JVC World
1 25/05/07 001 1:03:16
2 17/06/07 005 1:35:25
3 20/06/07 003 0:10:23
4 25/06/07 001 0:07:19
Favorite music
children001-002
• If different types of files (Audio files, Video files and
Still picture files) are recorded on a disc/USB mass
storage class device, select the file type to play (see
page 37).
1 Program/Play list number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of the
recording equipment, etc.)
To move the highlight bar between group list and file list
(only for AV files and JPEG file):
Moves the bar to the file list.
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/play list*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of play lists
8 Number of chapters
Moves the bar to the group list.
To select an item in the list:
Move the highlight bar to the
desired item.
9 Playback time
*The title of the original program or play list may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.
• If you move the highlight bar
while playing back DVD-VR
or Audio files, the selected item
starts playback automatically.
To remove the control screen, press ENTER/SET.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To start playback
For JPEG file:
To repeat slide-show for JPEG file
While playing or before starting playback...
• When repeating JPEG file on disc:
The selected file (still
picture) is displayed until
you change it.
(
DISC/
(
GROUP/
REPEAT DISC)
REPEAT GROUP)
Canceled
(
ALL/
(
OFF)
Slide-show playback
starts.
Each file (still picture) is
shown on the screen for a
few seconds, then changes
one after another.
REPEAT ALL)
• When repeating JPEG file in a USB mass storage class
device:
(
GROUP/
(
ALL/
REPEAT GROUP)
REPEAT ALL)
Canceled
For the other files:
(
OFF)
Playback starts with the
selected chapter/file.
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3 also
starts playback.
To repeat play for Video files
While playing or before starting playback...
• When repeating Video file on disc:
(
TRACK)
(
GROUP)
(
DISC)
REPEAT TRACK REPEAT GROUP REPEAT DISC
• Once you start viewing a JPEG file or Video file, the
control screen disappears.
• To cancel slide-show for JPEG file, and display the current
still picture, press 8.
Canceled
(
ALL)
(
OFF)
REPEAT ALL
• When repeating Video file in a USB mass storage class
device:
To stop playback
(
TRACK)
(
GROUP)
REPEAT TRACK
REPEAT GROUP
Canceled
(
ALL)
(
OFF)
REPEAT ALL
P 1
P
P 1 DISC
P ALL
Repeats the current file.
To repeat chapter/program/play list for DVD-VR
While playing or before starting playback...
For Original Program
Repeats the current group.
Repeats all files on the current disc.
Repeats all files in the USB mass storage
class device.
(
DISC)
(
PG)
(
CHAP)
P ALL DISC Repeats all loaded discs.
Canceled
(
OFF)
(
ALL)
• For Repeat Play of Audio file, see page 22.
For Play List
To zoom in the JPEG/ASF file
While playing...
• During slide-show for JPEG file, press 8 to display the still
picture, then...
(
PL)
(
CHAP)
Canceled
(
OFF)
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current program/play list.
(
ALL)
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
P 1*
P*
ZOOM OFF
P 1 DISC* Repeats all programs on the current disc.
ALL DISC Repeats all loaded discs.
*Not available before starting playback.
(while holding...)
P
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
• You can move the zoomed-in area by pressing
,
,
,
.
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly until “ZOOM
OFF” appears on the TV screen.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Operations
Recording onto a Tape
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
Main unit
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 12.
1 Insert a recordable cassette into deck B.
Push
Insert
Close
USB
MEMORY
TAPE-B
TAPE-A
Deck A
DISC 1-5
DUBBING
USB/DISC
REC START
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
REC
START/STOP
REVERSE
MODE
Tape direction indicator
Reverse Mode indicator
Deck B
Current source
To change the direction
(forward)
3
(reverse)
2
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back
copyrighted material without the consent of the
copyright owner.
Change the Reverse Mode if necessary
Before recording, select the Stereo Mode
(“STEREO”—see page 15) for multi-channel
encoded software to downmix its multi-channel
sound; otherwise, you can only record the front left/
right sound onto a tape.
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start
(
)
recording in the forward (3) direction.
• The channel level setting (see page 13 and 38)
affects the recording.
To record on only one side.
3 Start playing the source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “DVD/CD,” “USB,” “TAPE-A” or
“AUX.”
• When recording from a disc/USB mass storage class
device, you can also use “Synchronized Recording”
(see page 30).
• When recording from deck A, you can also use
“Dubbing” (see “Dubbing Tapes” on page 30).
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Start recording.
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
• See step 2 of “Recording onto a Tape” on page 29.
3 Select the source you want to record.
• When recording from the disc:
To stop recording
Select the disc number you want to start recording from.
or
Dubbing Tapes
Main Unit
ONLY
•
When recording from the USB mass storage class device:
You can record a tape from deck A to deck B.
1 Change the source to “TAPE.”
For recording desired tracks/files from discs:
You can program tracks/files to record in your preferred
order.
Select Program Play (and make a program; see page 20)
before starting playback.
2 Insert the source cassette in deck A, and a recordable
cassette in deck B.
3 Check the tape running direction on the display.
See step 2 of “Recording onto a Tape” on page 29.
4 Start dubbing.
4 Start recording.
Playback and recording start from the
first track/file.
• The System automatically creates
4-second blank between the tunes
recorded on the tapes.
• When either playback or recording ends, both playback
and recording stop at the same time.
• When either tape playback or recording ends, both cassette
decks stop at the same time.
To cancel while recording
To record only your favorite track/file
—One Track Recording
You can specify track/file to be recorded on the tape while
listening to a disc/USB mass storage class device.
• This function is available only for CD/VCD/SVCD/DVD
Audio and Audio files (without PBC for SVCD/VCD).
• Not available with Program Play and Random Play.
Synchronized Recording
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
While the track/file you want to record is playing...
Playback returns to the beginning of
that track/file and the track/file is
You can start and stop both playback and tape recording at
the same time.
• This function is available only for CD/VCD/SVCD/DVD
Audio/DVD Video and Audio files.
recorded on the tape. After recording,
both playback and recording stop.
• Not available with Random Play.
To cancel while recording
1 Load a disc or connect a USB mass storage class
device and insert a recordable cassette.
or
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Karaoke
• When you activate the Mic Mixing or Vocal Masking,
Remote control
multi-channel surround modes you selected will be
changed to “ALL CH ST” temporarily (“AUTO” will be
changed to “ALL CH ST” and “STEREO” remain as
“STEREO”).
IMPORTANT
• Always set MIC LEVEL to “0” when connecting or
disconnecting the microphone.
• MIC LEVEL adjustment is valid for both microphones
connected to the MIC1 and MIC2 jacks.
• MIC LEVEL and MICVOL mentioned in this Instruction
Book carry the same meaning.
Number
buttons
VOCAL SUPP.
CANCEL
MIC MIX
RESERVE
VOCAL
MASKING
KARAOKE SETTING
KARAOKE SCORING
KARAOKE
,
SETTING
KARAOKE
SETTING
/
/
Source
selecting
buttons
Singing Along (Karaoke)
You can enjoy singing along (Karaoke) by using one or two
microphones.
• By pressing REC START/STOP, you can record your
singing-along.
+, –
AUDIO VOL
SHIFT
1 Turn MIC LEVEL to “0”.
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC1 and/or MIC2 jack.
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
Main unit
3 Start playing a source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “DVD/CD,” “USB,” “TAPE-A,”
“TAPE-B” or “AUX.”
• For Karaoke discs: Select a desired audio channel. See
“Selecting the Audio Track” on page 17.
KARAOKE
SCORING
4 Sing into the microphone.
VOLUME –,+
5 Adjust the MIC LEVEL and VOLUME.
REC
START/STOP
To use microphone only, select “DVD/CD” or “USB” in
step 3, but do not start playback.
MIC LEVEL –,+
MIC1
To cancel the Mic Mixing
MIC2
MIC MIX
MIC OFF
(Canceled)
(while holding...)
DO NOT keep the microphones
connected while they are not in use.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC1 and/or MIC2 jack.
Adjusting the Sound Track for Karaoke
Mic Mixing will be activated.
Remote
ONLY
INFO
• If a microphone is already connected but Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to activate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
You can adjust the sound track for Karaoke.
For stereo (2-channel) source: By selecting VOCAL
MASK, you can reduce the lead vocal—Vocal Masking.
For Karaoke disc: By selecting L CHANNEL or
R CHANNEL, you can select the audio channel to play.
3 Activate Karaoke Scoring.
“KSCORE ON” appears on the display.
While Mic Mixing is activated...
VOCAL MASK L CHANNEL
(while holding...)
OFF
(Canceled)
R CHANNEL
• During Karaoke Scoring, scoring will start when
playback is started.
• To cancel Karaoke Scoring before playback, press the same
button again. “KSCORE OFF” appears on the display.
(while holding...)
4 Start playback and sing into the microphone.
Karaoke Scoring starts.
VOCAL MASK
L CHANNEL
Reduces the vocal from stereo
(2-channel) source.
• Adjust echo level and key if you want. (See “To apply an
echo to your voice” and “To adjust the key” on page 33.)
• When you press 4 or ¢, Karaoke Scoring is
canceled and restarts from the selected track/file.
Reproduces only the left audio channel.
R CHANNEL Reproduces only the right audio channel.
To return to normal playback, select “OFF.”
After the song ends, playback stops and the score board
appears on the TV screen with fanfare.
Ex.:
Your score
To return to normal playback temporarily
KARAOKE SCORE BOARD
This function allows you to recover the lead vocal
temporarily for your reference.
85
POINTS
Very good!!
While “VOCAL MASK,” “L CHANNEL” or “R
CHANNEL” is activated...
1
2
3
ST
93
85
73
POINTS
POINTS
POINTS
The latest
top 3
ND
RD
The vocal or stereo effect will be restored
temporarily.
8.0
kcal
The calorie you consumed in your singing
• When you press 8, Karaoke Scoring is canceled. When
playback starts again, Karaoke Scoring restarts.
• If you do not sing for about 2 minutes after Karaoke
Scoring starts, Karaoke Scoring is canceled.
To return to VOCAL MASK, L CHANNEL or
R CHANNEL, press the same button again.
• If you sing a song too quietly for the System to detect your
voice for about 2 minutes after Karaoke Scoring starts,
Karaoke scoring may be canceled.
• To obtain a correct scoring result, it is recommended to
sing the song completely. If the singing time is less than 3
minutes, the scoring result may be “0” or incorrect.
To stop the playback in the middle of the song, press 7.
Karaoke Scoring is not canceled and your singing along is
scored until that time.
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill
INFO
This System can score your Karaoke skill by comparing your
singing along with the vocal on the playback source.
• This function is available only for disc/USB mass storage
class device playback.
• This function is not available for DVD Audio.
• It is recommended to select the soundtrack as follows (see
also page 17):
For Karaoke DVD Video: Select a sound track with vocal.
For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: Select “ST,” “ST1” or “ST2.”
• After selecting a sound track, select “VOCAL MASK,”
To activate Karaoke Scoring in the middle of the song,
press KARAOKE SCORING. “SCORING START”
appears on the display, then scoring starts from that point.
To deactivate Karaoke Scoring in the middle of the song
during playback, press KARAOKE SCORING.
“SCORING CANCEL” appears on the display.
• Once you deactivate Karaoke Scoring in the same song during
playback, pressing KARAOKE SCORING switches
“KSCORE ON” and “KSCORE OFF” alternately.
• When you reactivate Karaoke Scoring in the same song
during playback and “KSCORE ON” is selected, scoring
starts from the next track.
“L CHANNEL” or “R CHANNEL” using the VOCAL
MASKING button (see above).
1 Select “DVD/CD” or “USB” as the source.
or
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To change the scoring level
Changing the Karaoke Setting
You can change five settings for Karaoke.
• To exit from Karaoke setting, wait for several seconds after
the setting is done.
You can change the scoring level of Karaoke Scoring.
• This function is available only for disc/USB mass storage
class device playback.
1 Select “DVD/CD” or “USB” as the source.
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
To apply an echo to your voice
1
MIC1 and/or MIC2 jack.
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
KEYCON*
• If a microphone is already connected but Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to activate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
MICVOL
ECHO
*
FANFARE*
SCORE LVL
3
*Appears only when “DVD/CD” or “USB” is selected as
the source with Mic Mixing activated.
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON
2 Adjust the echo level.
FANFARE
SCORE LVL
4 Select the scoring level setting.
PRO
ECHO OFF
(Canceled)
ECHO 1
ECHO 5 ECHO 4
ECHO 2
ECHO 3
AMATEUR
ECHO 6
• As the number increases, echo level also increases.
PRO
Scoring level is strict.
Remote
AMATEUR
Scoring level is lenient.
ONLY
To adjust the key
• This function is available for disc/USB mass storage class
device playback.
Remote
ONLY
To turn on/off the fanfare
You can turn the fanfare on or off for Karaoke Scoring.
• This function is available only for disc/USB mass storage
class device playback.
• This function is available only for CD/VCD/SVCD/DVD
Video and Audio files.
• Key adjustment will be canceled when you deactivate Mic
Mixing, or select another disc, track or file.
1 Select “DVD/CD” or “USB” as the source.
1 Select “DVD/CD” or “USB” as the source.
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC1 and/or MIC2 jack.
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
MIC1 and/or MIC2 jack.
• If a microphone is already connected but Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to activate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
• If a microphone is already connected but Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to activate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
3
3 Start playback, then...
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON
SCORE LVL
FANFARE
FANFARE
SCORE LVL
4 Select the fanfare setting.
4 Adjust the key.
To raise the key (up to +6).
To lower the key (up to –6).
ON
OFF
(Canceled)
To return to normal key, select “0.”
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Select songs you want for Karaoke Program Play.
Press the number buttons to select a song in the following
order.
To change the mic volume
Remote
ONLY
1
KEYCON*
1 Select a disc.
2 Select a title/group.
3 Select a chapter/track/file.
MICVOL
ECHO
*
FANFARE*
SCORE LVL
• To select a number, see
“How to select a number”
on page 8.
*Appears only when “DVD/CD” or “USB” is selected as
the source with Mic Mixing activated.
2 Select the volume level.
• To cancel the procedure,
press RESERVE while
holding SHIFT. The
PROGRAM indicator
disappears.
6 Start playback.
• The mic volume level can be adjusted in 16 steps
(MICVOL 0 – 15).
Karaoke Reserve screen disappears and playback starts in
the order you have programmed.
• For the Karaoke Program Play with Karaoke
Scoring: Each time the song ends, playback stops and
the score board appears. Press DVD/CD 3 to start
playback of the next track.
Reserving Karaoke Songs
Remote
ONLY
—Karaoke Program Play
You can determine the playback order of the titles, chapters,
tracks or files on the disc player. You can program up to 12
steps.
• This function is not available for files in a USB mass
storage class device.
INFO
7 Sing into the microphone.
To check the programmed contents
1
Select “DVD/CD” as the source.
2 Turn the MIC LEVEL to “0”.
(while holding...)
Karaoke Reserve screen appears.
• You cannot display Karaoke Reserve screen while
Karaoke Scoring is in use.
3 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC1 or MIC2 jack.
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
• If a microphone is already connected but Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to activate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
To modify the program
While Karaoke Reserve screen is shown on the TV...
4 Activate Karaoke Program Play.
To erase the unwanted step:
No Disc Gr/Tt Tr/Chap
1
2
3
4
5
(while holding...)
On the TV screen
(while holding...)
• The PROGRAM indicator flashes during this mode.
To erase the entire program, repeat the procedure.
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 5.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations
1 Select one of the timer setting modes—ON for
Recording Timer or Daily Timer.
Remote control
Recording Timer
Daily Timer
ON
REC TIMER
Canceled
DAILYTIMER
Clock setting
ON
(while holding...)
AUDIO
CLOCK/TIMER
SLEEP
CANCEL
2 Make the timer setting as you want.
, ,
ENTER/SET
Repeat the procedure for the following settings until
finished.
1
2
3
Set the hour then minute for on-time.
Set the hour then minute for off-time.
For Recording Timer: Select the playback
source—“TUNER-FM,” “TUNER-AM” or
“AUX.”
SHIFT
For Daily Timer: Select the playback source—
“TUNER-FM,” “TUNER-AM,” “DISC,” “USB,”
“TAPE-A,” “TAPE-B” or “AUX.”
EX.: When “TUNER-FM” is selected.
• When you select “AUX” as the source, you also
need to set the timer of the external component.
Select an item you want to play or record as
follows.
“TUNER-FM” and “TUNER-AM”: Preset station.
“DISC”: Disc, group/title and track/file/chapter.
“USB”: Group and file.
4
5
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Timer
INFO
Select the volume level.
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite
song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can
make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You cannot activate Daily Timer and Recording Timer at
the same time. (Activating one timer deactivates the other
timer.)
• You can select the volume level (“VOLUME 0” –
“VOLUME 30” and “VOLUME --”). If you select
“VOLUME --,” the volume is set to the last level
when the System has been turned off.
After making the timer setting, “SET OK” appears and your
setting items appear on the display one after another.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL
while holding SHIFT. You can return to the previous step.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn on the timer again, repeat step 1 and press
ENTER/SET in step 2.
3 Turn off the System (on standby) if you have set the
timer with the System turned on.
Remote
ONLY
Turning Off the Power Automatically
With Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep while listening to
music.
How Recording Timer works
When Recording Timer has been set, the timer indicator
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
(
) and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
10 20 30 60 90
Recording Timer works only once.
• Recording Timer starts working only when the System
is turned off (on standby).
Canceled
180 150 120
(while holding...)
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station, sets
the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.
2 Wait until the set time disappears.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
When the off-time comes
The System stops recording, and turns off (on standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
• If you press the button
repeatedly, you can change
the shut-off time.
How Daily Timer works
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer indicator
(while holding...)
(
) and DAILY indicator are lit on the display. Daily
Timer is activated at the same time everyday until the
timer is turned off manually (see below).
• Daily Timer starts working only when the System is
turned off (on standby).
Timer Priority
If Timer settings overlap, the timers work as described
below.
When the on-time comes
• Sleep Timer has priority over the Recording Timer and
Daily Timer.
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or
starts playing the specified source, and sets the volume
level gradually to the preset level after about 30 seconds.
Canceled
When the off-time comes
The System stops playback, and turns off (standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
Sleep Timer
To turn off the Timer after the setting is done
You can turn off the timer after it has been set.
The System turns off.
• Since Daily Timer works at the same time everyday, you
may need to cancel it on some particular days.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer does not work.
1 Select the timer (REC TIMER or DAILYTIMER)
Recording/Playback
Canceled
you want to cancel.
DAILY Timer
Recording Timer
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
ON
REC TIMER
Canceled
DAILYTIMER
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
Clock setting
ON
(while holding...)
Sleep Timer
2 Turn off the selected timer.
The System turns off.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer is canceled. (If
Sleep Timer shuts off the System earlier than the off time
you have set for Recording Timer, recording stops when
Sleep Timer shuts off the System.)
(while holding...)
• The timer indicator (
) goes off.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Operations
Basic Procedure
INFO
Remote Control
You can change the setting of the System.
• The setup menu can be used only when “DVD/CD” or
“USB” is selected as the source.
1 Press SET UP while playback is stopped.
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
SET UP
2 Press (or ) to select the menu.
3 Press (or ) to select the item.
4 Press ENTER/SET.
5 Press (or ) to select the options, then press
ENTER/SET.
To erase a preference display, press SET UP.
LANGUAGE menu
Item
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
Contents
You can select the initial menu language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select the initial audio language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select the initial subtitle language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select “ENGLISH,” “CHINESE,” or “SPANISH” as the on-screen language.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
PICTURE menu
Item
Contents
MONITOR TYPE
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play back picture recorded for wide-
screen televisions.
16:9
4:3 LB
16:9 NORMAL/16:9 MULTI NORMAL (Wide television screen): Select this when the aspect ratio
of your wide TV is fixed to 16:9.
16:9 AUTO/16:9 MULTI AUTO (Wide television screen): Select this when your TV is an ordinary
wide TV.
4:3 PS
4:3 LB/4:3 MULTI LB (Letter Box conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. Displays a wide-
screen picture to fit the width of the TV screen keeping the aspect ratio.
4:3 PS/4:3 MULTI PS (Pan Scan conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. The picture is zoomed
in to fill the screen vertically and the left and right sides of the picture are cut off.
• By selecting “MULTI” mode, the color system of the System changes automatically to match the
color system of the picture. For the color system setting, see page 6.
PICTURE SOURCE
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting the type of the video source.
AUTO: Normally, select this option. The System recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of
the current picture according to its information.
FILM: For a film source picture.
VIDEO: For a video source picture.
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
You can set the screen saver function to ON or OFF.
ON: The on-screen display becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.
OFF: To cancel the screen saver.
You can select a file type to play.
AUDIO: To play Audio files. (MP3/WMA/WAV files.)
STILL PICTURE: To play Still Picture files. (JPEG file.)
VIDEO: To play Video files. (MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/DivX files.)
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO menu
Item
Contents
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing Dolby Digital software.
AUTO: Select to apply the compression only to multi-channel encoded audio (except for 1-channel
and 2-channel sources.)
ON: Select this to always apply the compression.
SPK. SETTING menu
Item
Contents
LEVEL
Select this item, then press ENTER/SET to show the LEVEL submenu for adjusting the speaker output
level.
LEVEL
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER
FRONT LEFT/RIGHT SPEAKER, CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND RIGHT/LEFT
SPEAKER: Select the speaker, then adjust the output level (–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps).
TEST TONE: Turns on/off the test tone.
0dB
0dB
FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
0dB
0dB
SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER
SURROUND LEFT SPEAKER
TEST TONE
0dB
OFF
• Select “ALL CH ST,” “MUSIC,” or “MOVIE” (see page 15) to adjust the output level for all
speakers with the test tone.
DELAY
Select this item, then press ENTER/SET to show the DELAY submenu for adjusting the speaker delay
time.
DELAY
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER
FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
0
0
ms
FRONT LEFT/RIGHT SPEAKER, CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND RIGHT/LEFT
SPEAKER: Select the speaker, then adjust the delay time (0 ms to 15 ms in 1 ms steps).
• Set one speaker to “0 ms,” then set other speakers so that the sound from all speakers can reach you
at the same time.
ms
0
0
ms
ms
SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER
SURROUND LEFT SPEAKER
0
ms
OTHERS menu
Item
Contents
RESUME
You can select Resume.
ON: The System resumes playback from the position where playback has been stopped (not applicable
for CD).
OFF: Resume is deactivated.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
DivX REGISTRATION
Activate or deactivate the on-screen guide.
ON: Activate the on-screen guide.
OFF: Deactivate the on-screen guide.
The System has its own Registration Code.
If necessary, you can confirm it.
Once you have played back a DivX file in which the Registration Code is recorded, the System’s
Registration Code is overwritten for copyright protection.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the TV
You can operate JVC’s TV using the remote control supplied
for this System.
Remote control
To turn on or To select the input mode (either TV or
off the TV:
VIDEO):
TV
TV/VIDEO
(while holding...)
To adjust TV volume:
(while holding...)
TV CH +,–
SHIFT
TV VOL +,–
To select the TV channel:
(while holding...)
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
– JVC bears no responsibility for any loss of data in the
Learning More about This System
USB mass storage class device while using this System.
– When connecting with a USB cable, use the cable whose
length is less than 1 m.
– This System is compatible with USB 2.0 Full Speed.
– You can play back the following types of files in a USB
mass storage class device (maximum data transfer rate: 2
Mbps):
– Audio: MP3, WMA, WAV
– Still picture: JPEG
– Video: MPEG-1, MPEG-2, ASF, DivX (maximum
frame rate of 30 fps for progressive)
Connections (see pages 3 to 6)
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode:
• If you play back an NTSC disc/file with the color system
set to “PAL (PROG),” the disc/file will be reproduced
using “PAL 60” format; however, if the TV does not
support this format, the screen may not display properly.
• If you play back a PAL disc/file with the color system set
to “NTSC (PROG),” you can watch the playback pictures,
but the following symptoms may occur:
– The items on the menu will be blurred, and be shown
slightly shifted when highlighted.
– This System may not play back some files even though
their formats are listed above.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the
original aspect ratio.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
• You cannot change the scanning mode to progressive in the
following cases:
– When your TV does not support the progressive video
input.
– When you have not connected your TV to the unit using
a component video cord.
– You cannot play back a file larger than 2 Gigabyte.
– When playing a file which has a high transfer rate, frames
or sounds may be dropped during playback.
– This System cannot recognize a USB mass storage class
device whose rating is other than 5 V and does not exceed
500 mA.
– This System may not play back some USB mass storage
class devices and does not support DRM (Digital Rights
Management).
• When you play back an NTSC disc/file in progressive
scanning mode (either NTSC PROG or PAL PROG), the
System outputs the NTSC signal regardless of the color
system settings.
– It will take some time to start up a Digital Audio Player
(DAP) larger than 1 Gigabyte.
– You cannot send any data to your USB mass storage
class device from this System.
• For MP3/WMA/WAV playback...
Daily Operations—Playback (see pages 8 to 12)
Listening to the Radio:
– MP3/WMA/WAV discs require a longer readout time
than regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the
group/file configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA/WAV files cannot be played back and
will be skipped. This results from their recording
processes and conditions.
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number,
the previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the preset stations may be erased in a few days. If
this happens, preset the stations again.
Playing Back a Disc/USB Mass Storage Class Device:
• When you change the source to “DVD/CD” or
“USB,” it may take a while to activate the source.
• While the System is reading a disc, the source may not
change to “USB MEMORY” correctly. In this case, press
7, then reactivate “USB MEMORY” as the source.
• On some discs/files, the actual operations may be different
from what is explained in this manual, due to the
programming and disc structure; such differences are not a
malfunction of this System.
– When making MP3/WMA/WAV discs, use ISO 9660
Level 1 or Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA/WAV files with
the extension code <.mp3>, <.wma> or <.wav>
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you make each MP3/WMA/
WAV files at the following conditions:
– MP3/WMA: At a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and bit
rate of 128 kbps.
– WAV: 44.1 kHz/16 bit Linear PCM.
– This System cannot play back files made at bit rate of
less than 64 kbps.
• For playback of files in the USB mass storage class
device...
• For DVD-VR playback...
– When connecting a USB mass storage class device, refer
also to its manual.
– Connect one USB mass storage class device to the
System at a time. Do not use a USB hub.
–
Original Program: The System can play back the
original picture in the recorded order.
Play List: The System can play back the play list edited
by the recording equipment.
–
– You cannot charge any other USB mass storage class
– For details about DVD-VR format and play list, refer to
the manual of the recording equipment.
device through the
System.
(USB memory) terminal of this
– While playing back a file in a USB mass storage class
device, do not disconnect the device. It may cause a
malfunction of both the System and the device.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For JPEG playback...
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
(see pages 13 to 16)
Adjusting the Speaker Output Level:
• The channel level cannot change during Mic Mixing,
Vocal Masking or Karaoke Scoring.
Reinforcing the Bass Sound:
• You cannot adjust the Active Bass level when the
headphones are connected.
– This System can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg> or <.jpeg> (regardless of the letter case—
upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of
more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be
shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files*.
Progressive JPEG files* or lossless JPEG files* cannot
be played.
Applying an Optimal Bass Sound Effect—VARIO
BASS:
* Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras,
• If you plug in a microphone and Mic Mixing is activated,
the System will automatically switches the mode to
LITE.n.EASY even if the mode is set to OFF.
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode:
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the User Mode settings may be erased in a few
days. If this happens, set the User Modes again.
web, etc.
Progressive JPEG format:Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used
now.
• For MPEG-1/MPEG-2 playback...
– This System can play back MPEG-1/MPEG-2 files with
the extension code <.mpg> or <.mpeg> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
– The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
– 720 x 576 pixels (25 fps)/720 x 480 pixels (30 fps) is
recommended for the highest resolution.
– This System also supports the resolutions of 352 x 576/
480 x 576/352 x 288 pixels (25 fps) and 352 x 480/480 x
480/352 x 240 pixels (30 fps).
– The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
– Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or MPEG2 Audio Layer-2.
Selecting the Surround Modes:
• Dolby Pro Logic II Modes: Dolby Pro Logic II Mode is a
multi-channel playback format to convert 2-channel
sources into 5.1-channels. Dolby Pro Logic II reproduces
spacious sound from original sound without adding any
new sounds or tonal colorations.
• While you use the headphones, the Surround Mode is
canceled temporarily.
• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmix. While playing
back such a disc...
– You cannot change the Surround Mode.
– The System plays back the left front and right front
signals when you have selected “STEREO” for the
Surround Mode or when you use the headphones.
• Dolby PL II MUSIC/MOVIE take no effect to MPEG-1/
MPEG-2/ASF/DivX files.
• For ASF playback...
– This System can play back ASF files with the extension
code <.asf> (regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– This System supports ASF files whose resolution is
352 x 288 pixels or less.
– Some recorded files may not be able to played back
depending on file characteristics, kind of digital still/
video cameras, or recording conditions.
• For DivX playback...
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this
happens, reset the clock.
Unique Video Disc/File Operations (see pages 17
to 19)
Selecting the Audio Track:
• On some disc/file, you cannot change audio languages
– The System supports DivX 6.x, 5.x, 4.x and 3.11.
– When making a disc, use the UDF-Bridge format.
“Multi-border” is not supported.
– The System supports DivX files whose resolution is 720
x 480 pixels or less (30 fps), and 720 x 576 pixels or less
(25 fps).
while playing back.
Playing Back Bonus Group:
• You cannot select a track in the bonus group for Program
– Audio stream should conform to Dolby Digital, MPEG1
Audio Layer- 2 or MPEG Audio Layer-3 (MP3).
– This System can play back DivX files with the extension
code <.divx> <.div> <.avi> (regardless of the letter
case—upper/lower).
Play.
Special Picture Playback:
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be
reproduced.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
– The System does not support GMC (Global Motion
Compression).
– The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode may
not be played back correctly.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• USB/DISC REC START button does not work:
– While playback is paused.
– When Random Play mode is selected.
Advanced Playback Operations (see pages 20
to 22)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
– While programming steps...
– When playing back in Program Play mode.
• When using Reverse Mode and the tape reaches its end in
the forward direction (3) during recording, the last song
will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side (2).
• When using Reverse Mode and the tape reaches its end in
the reverse side (2) during recording, recording stops even
though the disc/USB mass storage class device is not
entirely recorded.
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program
an item number that does not exist on the disc (for
example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12
tracks).
– For SVCD/VCD/CD loaded on the other tray than the
current one, the System may prompt for the group
number entry as well; however, these entries will be
ignored during playback.
• The programmed contents will remain until you erase it.
• While the PROGRAM indicator is on, you cannot change
the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control and
DISC 1 – 5 # on the main unit do not work.)
Enjoying Karaoke (see pages 31 to 34)
General:
• When Mic Mixing or Vocal Masking is activated:
– Multi-channel source will be down-mixed.
– Dolby Pro Logic II will be canceled temporarily.
• When Mic Mixing is activated and ALL CH ST is selected
as the Surround mode, the output level of surround speaker
decreases.
• While recording onto a tape, Key adjustment, Echo and
Vocal Masking will be recorded. However, while
recording onto a tape using USB/DISC REC START, Key
adjustment will not be recorded.
On-Screen Operations (see pages 23 to 28)
Operations Using the On-screen Bar:
• A-B Repeat is possible only within the same title or within
the same track.
Recording Operations (see pages 29 to 30)
General:
• You cannot change the source during recording.
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the
start and the end of cassette tapes. Thus, before recording,
wind the leader tape first to ensure that the recording will
be made without any music part lost.
• If no cassette is inserted or a protected tape has been
inserted, “NO REC” appears on the display.
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus,
you can make sound adjustments other than Surround
Mode without affecting the recording level.
• While the System is turned on, connecting a microphone
automatically activates Mic Mixing and all the Karaoke
related functions.
• If you connect a microphone with the System turned off,
press MIC MIX while holding SHIFT to activate Mic
Mixing after turning the System on.
Adjusting the Sound Track for Karaoke:
• On some music, Vocal Masking does not provide the
correct effect.
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill:
Recording onto a Tape:
• Karaoke Scoring does not work for DVD Audio, but you
can activate or deactivate the function while playing back
DVD Audio.
• While Karaoke Scoring is in use, you cannot deactivate
Mic Mixing or use MIC MIX, RESERVE and number
buttons.
• Activating Karaoke Scoring cancels Repeat Play.
• You cannot use Karaoke Scoring during Program Play,
Random Play, or recording. However, you can turn
Karaoke Scoring on and off by using
• While recording disc/USB mass storage class device,
plugging in and out headphones may cause sound
distortion and affect the recording.
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in
the forward (3) direction first; otherwise, recording will
stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
Synchronized Recording:
• You cannot open the disc tray while recording onto a tape
using USB/DISC REC START button.
• Recording starts from the first track even if you have
selected a track by using 4/¢. To specify track(s) to
record, program them (not applicable for USB mass
storage class device) or use One Track Recording.
• While recording, you cannot use disc/USB mass storage
class device operation buttons (except for 7).
• You cannot use Repeat Play during synchronized
recording (Repeat Play will be canceled).
KARAOKE SCORING button during these play modes.
• The ranking (top 3) is cleared when you turn off the
System.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play:
• You can use RESERVE button when a microphone is
plugged in. However, you can cancel Karaoke Program
Play using the button even if a microphone is not plugged
in. In case you reactivate Karaoke Program Play, plug in a
microphone.
• If you have selected a disc tray on which a disc containing
Video files or JPEG file or DVD-VR is loaded, that disc
number is skipped.
• If DVD-VR or a disc containing Video files and JPEG file
is loaded on the current tray, you cannot activate Karaoke
Program Play.
• When the track starts playback, that track number will be
erased from the Karaoke Reserve screen (the programmed
contents will remain until you erase it).
• While the PROGRAM indicator is flashing, you cannot
change the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control
and DISC 1 – 5 # on the main unit do not work.)
• For some VCD, the Karaoke Scoring result may not appear
at the end of the track if PBC is activated. In this case, press
7 to view your scoring result.
Setup Menu Operations (see pages 37 to 38)
General:
• If the upper and lower parts of the menu are cut off, adjust
the picture size control of the TV.
LANGUAGE menu:
• When the language you have selected for MENU
LANGUAGE, AUDIO LANGUAGE, or SUB TITLE is
not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the
initial language.
PICTURE menu—MONITOR TYPE:
• Even if “4:3 PS/4:3 MULTI PS” is selected, the screen size
may become 4:3 letter box with some disc. This depends on
how they are recorded.
• When you select “16:9 NORMAL/16:9 MULTI
NORMAL” or “16:9 AUTO/16:9 MULTI AUTO” for a
picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly
changes due to the process for converting the picture width.
SPK. SETTING menu—DELAY:
• See the following diagram as an example for setting the
delay time:
L, R
Front speakers:
LL
C
R
Timer Operations (see pages 35 to 36)
Setting the Timer:
0 ms
• If you do not specify the preset station or track number
correctly while setting a timer, the currently selected
station or the first track will be played when timer is
activated.
C
Center speaker:
1 ms
LS, RS
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the
clock first, then the timer again.
Surround speakers:
2 ms
LLSS
RS
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the
source while Recording Timer is recording.
• Daily Timer will not work correctly for some DVDs.
OTHERS menu—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• The setup menu and on-screen bar will be displayed (and
recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zoom-in always appear on
the display regardless of this setting.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the System
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs,
tapes and mechanism clean.
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System
is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean
with a dry cloth.
Handling discs
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become
damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the
following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
– DO NOT wipe it forcefully.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as
insecticides to it.
– DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact
for a long time.
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at the edge
while pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc when
placing it back in its case.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, extreme temperatures,
and moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list
for a possible solution before calling for service.
Handling cassette tapes
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by
inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in
the cassette.
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before
you finish.
] There is a time limit. Repeat procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
] The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to
external electrical interference. Unplug the AC power
cord and then plug it back in.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
] The path between the remote control and the remote
sensor on the System is blocked.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty
places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or
speaker, or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality:
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the
heads, capstans and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and
audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System is
turned off).
] The batteries are exhausted.
No sound is heard.
To protect your recording
] Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back
to protect from unexpected erasure or re-
recording.
To protect your recording, remove these
tabs.
] Headphones are connected.
No picture appears on the screen.
] The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV screen, the picture is
blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.
] The System is connected to a TV which does not support
progressive video input.
To re-record on a protected tape, cover
the holes with adhesive tape.
] Incorrect color system is selected (see page 6).
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the
screen.
] Select “4:3 LB /4:3 MULTI LB” for “MONITOR
TYPE” (see page 37).
Radio Operations:
Hard to hear broadcasts because of noise.
] Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
] The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
] The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc/file Operations:
The disc does not play.
Karaoke Operations:
Karaoke function cannot be activated.
] You have inserted a DVD Video whose Region Code is
not correct. (“REGION ERR” appears on the display.)
] The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the
label side up.
] Ensure at least 1 microphone is connected and Mic
Mixing is activated. If a microphone is not connected,
you cannot activate Mic Mixing and any other Karaoke
related function.
ID3 Tag on an MP3 disc cannot be shown.
Karaoke Scoring function cannot be activated.
] You cannot use Karaoke Scoring while recording, or
while the disc menu for DVD Video/SVCD/VCD is
shown on the TV screen.
Scoring result seems wrong (or “– –” appears).
] The time of the playback and singing along are too short
for Karaoke Scoring. It is recommended to sing more
than 3 minutes to obtain a correct scoring result.
] No sound from the microphone or the input level (MIC
LEVEL) is too low.
] You have sung too quietly.
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer or Recording Timer does not work.
] The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
]
There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
Groups and files are not played back as you expect.
] The playing order is determined when the files were
recorded. It depends on the application.
AV files are not played back.
] The disc or USB mass storage class device includes
different types of files (Audio file, Video file and Still
picture file.). In this case, you can play back the files
selected only by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see page 37).
] You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after the
System read the disc or the USB mass storage class
device. In this case, reload the disc or disconnect the
USB mass storage class device and connect it again.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
] The disc is scratched or dirty.
The playback sounds strange.
] Cancel Vocal Masking (see page 32).
] Cancel Key adjustment (see page 33).
No subtitle appears on the TV screen though you have
selected the initial subtitle language.
] Some discs are programmed to always display no
subtitle initially. If this happens, press SUB TITLE after
starting play (see page 18).
Audio language is different from the one you have
selected as the initial audio language.
] Some discs/files are programmed to always use the
original language initially. If this happens, press
AUDIO MPX after starting play (see page 17).
The disc tray does not open or close.
] The AC power cord is not plugged in.
] Child Lock is in use. “LOCKED” appears on the display
window (see page 22).
] Program Play is in use. Cancel Program Play (see
page 21).
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
] Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off
while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
Recording Operations:
“CANNOT REC” appears on the display.
] The System cannot perform recording.
Impossible to record.
] Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed.
Cover the holes with adhesive tape.
] Karaoke Scoring is in use. Cancel the Karaoke Scoring
(see page 32).
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Code List
AA Afar
FA Persian
FI Finnish
FJ Fiji
FO Faroese
FY Frisian
GA Irish
GD Scots Gaelic
GL Galician
GN Guarani
GU Gujarati
HA Hausa
HI Hindi
KM Cambodian
KN Kannada
KO Korean (KOR)
KS Kashmiri
KU Kurdish
KY Kirghiz
LA Latin
LN Lingala
LO Laothian
LT Lithuanian
LV Latvian, Lettish RW Kinyarwanda
OC Occitan
OM (Afan) Oromo
OR Oriya
SV Swedish
SW Swahili
TA Tamil
TE Telugu
TG Tajik
AB Abkhazian
AF Afrikaans
AM Ameharic
AR Arabic
AS Assamese
AY Aymara
AZ Azerbaijani
BA Bashkir
BE Byelorussian
BG Bulgarian
BH Bihari
PA Panjabi
PS Pashto, Pushto
PT Portuguese
QU Quechua
RM Rhaeto-Romance TK Turkmen
RN Kirundi
TH Thai
TI
Tigrinya
TL Tagalog
TN Setswana
TO Tonga
TR Turkish
TS Tsonga
TT Tatar
TW Twi
UK Ukrainian
UR Urdu
RO Rumanian
MG Malagasy
MI Maori
SA Sanskrit
SD Sindhi
SG Sangho
BI
Bislama
HR Croatian
BN Bengali, Bangla HY Armenian
MK Macedonian
ML Malayalam
MN Mongolian
MO Moldavian
MR Marathi
MS Malay (MAY)
MT Maltese
MY Burmese
NA Nauru
BO Tibetan
BR Breton
CA Catalan
CO Corsican
CY Welsh
DA Danish
DZ Bhutani
EL Greek
IA Interlingua
IE Interlingue
IK Inupiak
SH Serbo-Croatian
SI
Singhalese
SL Slovenian
SM Samoan
SN Shona
SO Somali
SQ Albanian
SR Serbian
SS Siswati
ST Sesotho
SU Sundanese
IN Indonesian
UZ Uzbek
IS
IW Hebrew
JI Yiddish
Icelandic
VI
Vietnamese
VO Volapuk
WO Wolof
XH Xhosa
YO Yoruba
ZU Zulu
JW Javanese
KA Georgian
KK Kazakh
EO Esperanto
ET Estonian
EU Basque
NE Nepali
NL Dutch
NO Norwegian
KL Greenlandic
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Amplifier section
Output Power:
Cassette deck section
Frequency response
FRONT SPEAKERS: 125 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into
6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total
harmonic distortion.
Normal (type I):
Wow and flutter:
50 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
SURROUND SPEAKERS:50 W per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total
harmonic distortion.
General
Power requirement:
AC 110 V / AC 127 V / AC 220 V /
CENTER SPEAKER: 50 W, min. RMS, driven into 6 Ω at 1 kHz
AC 230 V – AC 240 V
, (adjustable
with no more than 10% total harmonic distortion.
with the voltage selector), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Audio output:
Digital input:
SUBWOOFER OUT
(USB memory
For Australian model: AC 240 V
, 50 Hz
)
Audio input sensitivity/Impedance
Power consumption:
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 185 mm x 370 mm x 372 mm
Mass (approx.):
205 W (at operation) / 21 W (on standby)
(Measured at 1 kHz, with tape recording signal 300 mV)
AUX:
400 mV/47 kΩ
9.5 kg
MIC1/2:
3.0 mV/50 kΩ
VIDEO OUT:
Color system:
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO:
NTSC/NTSC PROG/PAL/PAL PROG
Supplied Accessories
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Y (luminance)
C (chrominance, burst)
NTSC
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
See page 3.
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
PAL
COMPONENT (Interlace/Progressive):
(Y)
(PB/PR)
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
“MLP Lossless”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Speaker Terminals: 6 Ω − 16 Ω (front/surround/center)
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of
DTS, Inc.
Tuner section
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
FM tuning range:
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
AM (MW) tuning range:
531 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz)
530 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz)
531 kHz – 1 602 kHz (at 9 kHz)
530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz)
®
For Saudi Arabia:
• “Official DivX Ultra Certified product” “Plays all versions of
®
®
DivX video (including DivX 6) with enhanced playback of
®
®
DivX media files and the DivX Media Format” “DivX, DivX
Ultra Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc.
and are used under licence.”
Disc/File player section
Region codes:
Middle East:
2
3
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
• USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS
PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGING IN PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITIES.
South East Asia:
Central and south America, Australia: 4
Playable disc:
DVD Video/DVD Audio/CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (CD/VCD/SVCD/MP3/
WMA/WAV/JPEG/MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/
DivX format)
DVD-R/-RW (DVD-VR/DVD-video/MP3/
WMA/WAV/JPEG/MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/
DivX format)
+R/+RW (DVD-video/MP3/WMA/WAV/
JPEG/MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/DivX format)
DVD-ROM (DVD-video/MP3/WMA/WAV/
JPEG/MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/DivX format)
MP3/WMA/WAV/JPEG/MPEG-1/MPEG-2/
ASF/DivX format
• “CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
Playable file:
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE
ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE
OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS,
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE
CONNECTION TO THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’
OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR
TV SET COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND
625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER
SERVICE CENTER.”
Dynamic range:
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
80 dB
500 lines
Immeasurable
USB storage section
USB specification:
Compatible device:
Compatible file system:
Bus power supply:
Compatible with USB 2.0 Full-Speed
Mass storage class
FAT 16, FAT 32
5 V/500 mA
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts Index
Remote control
Button
Page
Button
Page
REC START/
STOP
)
™
7
%
30
SOUND MODE
™
_
4
14
Button
Page
Button
MIC MIX
MENU/PL
Page
AUDIO
a
s
w
8, 36
39
6
j
k
31, 34
11, 27
24 – 26
SOUND MODE
14
USB/DISC
REC START
30
TV
7
10, 12, 21, 28, ON SCREEN
32
#
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
8, 12, 30
USB
MEMORY
8, 10, 30
#
¡
¢
8
1
4
,
c
r
e
z
8
9, 11, 12, 19
9, 11, 21
10, 19, 21
18
PAGE
i
r
y
y
7
3
18
@#
8, 12, 29, 30
9
VARIO BASS
=
!
14
,
PREV., NEXT
REPEAT
12
TUNING +,– § ¶
VOLUME
8, 9, 31
22, 28
22
REPEAT A-B
,
,
,
6, 9, 10, 11, 14 – RESERVE
16, 18, 21, 24 –
28, 34, 35, 37
34
Remote control
1
,
RETURN
12
ENTER/SET
Number
buttons
1
m
8 – 12, 19, 20, REVERSE
z
12, 29
26, 34
MODE
a
ACTIVE
BASS EXT
LEVEL + , –
13
SCAN MODE
SET UP
b
9
6
2
3
4
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
s
d
37
6
ANGLE
t
t
n
5
u
d
18
SHIFT
o
9, 11 – 16, 18 –
22, 28, 31, 32, 34
– 36, 39
f
9
7
AUDIO MPX
AUDIO VOL+,–
CANCEL
17
g
h
8, 9
5
6
7
10
10
21, 34, 36
13
SLEEP
4
c
u
v
i
l
/
7
36
j
CH. LEVEL
SLOW
9
,
(
19
8
9
p
q
w
e
CLOCK/
TIMER
16, 35, 36
SOUND MODE
14
SUB TITLE
18
k
l
/
z
x
DIMMER
DISC 1–5
DISPLAY
g
2
k
q
16
11
16
SURR MODE
15
3
TAPE A
TAPE B
8, 12
8, 12
11, 27
2 3
3
DVD/CD
8, 10, 20, 21, 28, TOP MENU/PG
32, 34
r
t
y
u
c
v
DVD LEVEL
;
b
15
9
TV CH + , –
TV VOL + , –
TV/VIDEO
USB
m
n
f
p
39
39
39
b
n
FADE
MUTING
FM/AM/AUX
x
e
8, 9, 10
8, 10, 28
,
32
i
o
;
m
3
MEMORY
FM/PLAY
MODE
9, 20, 21
VOCAL
9
f
32
MASKING
GROUP/
TITLE
r
j
h
11
VOCAL
SUPP.
32
KARAOKE
SCORING
32
VARIO BASS
VFP
;
b
v
14
KARAOKE
SETTING
33, 34
15
Main unit
ZOOM
19, 28
KARAOKE
SETTING + , –
8
33, 34
Main unit
Button
Page
8, 9, 36
7
Button
Page
10, 22
11, 30
30
0
#
2
3
∞
DISC1–5
DISC1–5
8
^
+
5
@
~
Display
7
10, 12, 22
DUBBING
¡
¢
8
1
4
#
,
§ ¶ 9, 11, 12, 19
£ ¢ 9, 11, 21
DVD/CD
8, 10
8, 9
,
FM/AM/AUX
6
*
10, 19, 21
6, 10
KARAOKE
SCORING
32
(USB
memory)
terminal
MIC1 , MIC2
MIC LEVEL
PHONES
-
0
(
31
31, 34
8
ACTIVE
BASS EX. +,–
# $ 13
PRESET +, – £ ¢ 10
0
DEMO
∞
1
6
PUSH OPEN
9 & 12, 29
¡ 12, 29
Disc trays
10
REVERSE
MODE
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,
Canada, and U.K.)
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line
voltage corresponds with the position of the voltage selector
switch provided on the outside of this equipment and, if
different, reset the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a
damage or risk of fire/electric shock.
Exclude Australian Model
EN
0108WMKMDCJMM
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM
CA-DXJ30
CA-DXJ21
CA-DXJ11
CA-DXJ11
CA-DXJ21
CA-DXJ30
SUPER VIDEO
CA-DXJ11/J21
CA-DXJ30
CA-DXJ30
INSTRUCTIONS
GVT0244-001A
[US, UN, UG, UX, A, UW]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings, Cautions and Others
Caution––
(standby/on) button!
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely (the STANDBY lamp goes off). When installing the apparatus,
ensure that the plug is easily accessible. The button in any position does not disconnect the mains line.
• When the System is on standby, the STANDBY lamp lights red.
• When the System is turned on, the STANDBY lamp goes off.
The power can be remote controlled.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these
batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall
be placed on the apparatus.
CAUTION
Excessive sound pressure from earphones or headphones can cause hearing loss.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover or cabinet. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible Class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED INSIDE THE UNIT.
[European Union only]
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front:
No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/Top/Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom:
Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing
on a stand with a height of 10 cm or more.
Front view
Side view
Wall or obstructions
Wall or obstructions
10 cm
10 cm
15 cm
10 cm
10 cm
CA-DXJ30
CA-DXJ21
CA-DXJ11
CA-DXJ30
CA-DXJ21
CA-DXJ11
10 cm
G-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Note on Region Code
Playable Disc/File Types
INFO
DVD players and DVD Video have their own Region Code
numbers. This System can play back only DVD Video with an
appropriate Region Code number.
*1
*1
• For details, see “Specifications” on page 47
EX.: For Southeast Asia
COMPACT
SUPER VIDEO
DIGITAL VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO
Audio formats
The “√” in the list below shows available disc/file types.
The System can play back the following digital audio
formats.
Media type
•
LPCM (Linear PCM),
DIGITAL (Dolby Digital),
Recording format
CD-R/ DVD-R/
USB mass
DTS (Digital Theater Systems), MPEG Audio, MLP
*2
-RW
-RW, +R/ storage class
(Meridian Lossless Packing)
*3
+RW
—
—
√
device
—
• Multi-channel sound will be downmixed into 2-channels.
To enjoy multi-channel sound, connect a compatible
decoder or an amplifier with a compatible decoder to the
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal on the rear.
CD-DA (normal CD)
VCD/SVCD
√
√
—
DVD Video
—
—
—
—
*1
How to Read This Manual
• Button and control operations are explained in the table
below.
DVD Audio
√
√
—
*4
DVD-VR
—
Audio file:
•
Some related tips and notes are explained later in the
sections “Learning More about This System” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
MP3/WMA/WAV
Video file:
MPEG-1/MPEG-2/
ASF/DivX
explaining the operations (
indicates that the
INFO
content has some information).
Still picture file:
JPEG
Indicates that you press the button briefly.
*1 CA-DXJ30 only
Indicates that you press the button briefly
and repeatedly until an option you want is
selected.
*2 Recorded with “ISO 9660” format.
*3 Recorded with “UDF-Bridge” format.
*4 Not applicable for +R/+RW.
In addition to the above discs/files, this System can play
back audio data recorded on CD-Extra and DVD/CD Text.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD-RAM, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo CD and CD-G
(CD-Graphics).
Indicates that you press one of the buttons.
Indicates that you press and hold the button
for a specified period.
The number inside the arrow indicates the
period of a press (in the example, 2 seconds).
2sec.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage
the speakers.
• CA-DXJ11 and CA-DXJ21 cannot play back DVD-VR disc
with CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media).
• DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used
for AV file operations.
• It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (DVD Video
format only) discs.
Indicates that you turn the control toward the
specified direction(s).
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the remote control.
Remote
ONLY
Caution for DualDisc playback:
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the main unit.
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Main Unit
ONLY
About color system
This System accommodates both NTSC and PAL system
and can play back discs/files recorded in either system.
To change the color system, see page 6.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions
Contents
Connections....................................................................................3
Connecting a USB Mass storage class device ............................6
Preparing the Remote Control ....................................................6
Cancelling the Demonstration ....................................................6
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode.......................6
Display Indication .........................................................................7
Daily Operations—Playback........................................................8
Adjusting the Volume.................................................................9
Listening to the Radio.................................................................9
Playing Back a Disc/USB Mass Storage Class Device ............10
Playing Back a Tape .................................................................12
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments.......................13
Adjusting the Speaker Output Balance.....................................13
Reinforcing the Bass Sound......................................................13
Applying an Optimal Bass Sound Effect–VARIO BASS ........13
Selecting the Sound Modes.......................................................14
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode......................14
Creating 3-Dimensional Sound Field—3D Phonic ..................15
Presetting Automatic DVD Video
Installation
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to
prevent internal heat build-up in the System.
DO NOT install the System in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor
too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference
with the TV.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always
pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Sound Increase Level............................................................15
Changing the Picture Tone .......................................................15
Changing the Display Brightness .............................................16
Setting the Clock.......................................................................16
Unique Video Disc/File Operations ...........................................17
Selecting the Audio Track ........................................................17
Selecting the Subtitle Language ...............................................18
Selecting the View Angle .........................................................18
Reviewing the Playback Quickly..............................................18
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures............................................18
Playing Back Bonus Group.......................................................19
Special Picture Playback...........................................................19
Advanced Playback Operations.................................................20
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play.....................20
Playing at Random—Random Play..........................................21
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play............................................22
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock....................................22
On-Screen Operations ................................................................23
On-screen Bar Information.......................................................23
Operations Using the On-screen Bar ........................................24
Operations Using the Control Screen .......................................27
Recording Operations.................................................................29
Recording onto a Tape..............................................................29
Dubbing Tapes..........................................................................30
Synchronized Recording...........................................................30
Enjoying Karaoke .......................................................................31
Singing Along (Karaoke)..........................................................31
Adjusting the Sound Track for Karaoke...................................32
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill......................................................32
Changing the Karaoke Setting..................................................33
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play ................34
Timer Operations........................................................................35
Setting the Timer ......................................................................35
Turning Off the Power Automatically......................................36
Timer Priority ...........................................................................36
Setup Menu Operations..............................................................37
Operating the TV ........................................................................39
Additional Information...............................................................40
Learning More about This System............................................40
Troubleshooting........................................................................44
Specifications............................................................................47
Parts Index ..................................................................................48
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with
wet hands.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense in the lenses on the System in the
following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm
place.
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case,
leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture
evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Internal heat
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the System.
Poor ventilation could overheat and damage the System.
–A cooling fan is inside the System to prevent heat
build-up.
DO NOT block the ventilation openings or
holes. If they are blocked by a newspaper or
cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System,
unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before
operating any further.
DO NOT disassemble the System since there
are no user serviceable parts inside.
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended
period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall
outlet.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and
consult your dealer.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Do not connect the AC power cord until all other
connections have been made.
Supplied accessories
• FM antenna (x1)
• AM loop antenna (x1)
• Composite video cord (x1)
• Remote control (x1)
• Batteries (x2)
• AC plug adapter (x1)
(not supplied for Australia, Thailand and the Middle
East.)
• Connect VIDEO OUT directly to the video input of your
TV. Connecting VIDEO OUT to a TV via a VCR may
interfere with your viewing when playing back a copy-
protected source. Connecting VIDEO OUT to an integrated
TV/VCR system may interfere with your viewing.
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
~ From the video input of TV/monitor
See page 4.
CA-DXJ11 and CA-DXJ21 do not have
component jacks.
Ÿ From the digital input of digital audio
component
See page 4.
! From AM/FM antenna
See page 4.
⁄
From the subwoofers (CA-DXJ30 only)
See page 5.
From the speakers
See page 5.
CA-DXJ21 has 3 speaker terminals.
@ From the analog audio output of auxiliary
equipment (VCR, etc.)
See page 4.
¤ Voltage selector
(not applicable for Australian models)
Before plugging in, confirm the position the
voltage selector points at. See page 5.
# To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all
connections are complete.
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug,
use the supplied AC plug adapter (not
supplied for Australian, Thailand and the
Middle East models).
The illustration above is CA-DXJ30.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ TV/monitor
! AM/FM antenna
To assemble the AM loop antenna
Composite video
cord (supplied)
S-Video cord
(not supplied)
Green
Component video cord (not supplied)
Red
Blue
To connect AM/FM antenna
• If the antenna cord is covered with vinyl on the tip, twist and
pull the vinyl off to remove.
• To select progressive scanning mode (see page 6), use
COMPONENT jacks.
• Connect the VIDEO jack, S-VIDEO jack, or
COMPONENT jacks (CA-DXJ30 only); whichever you
want to use.
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn until the best reception is
obtained.
• You can get better picture quality in the order—
Composite video
]
S video
]
Component video.
Ÿ Digital audio component
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
Optical digital cord
(not supplied)
Protective cap
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain the best
reception.
• Set “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” in the “AUDIO” menu
correctly according to the connected digital audio
equipment (see page 38).
For better FM reception
• The digital signal through the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal is transmitted only when “DVD/CD” is
selected as the source.
FM outdoor antenna
(not supplied)
• Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect an
outdoor FM antenna using a 75 Ω wire with coaxial type
connector (IEC or DIN45325).
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords or the power cord. Also, keep
the antennas away from metallic parts of the System,
connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause
poor reception.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Use only speakers with the same speaker impedance as
indicated by the speaker terminals on the rear of the System.
• The front speakers and subwoofer(s) are magnetically
shielded to avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not
installed properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay
attention to the following when installing the speakers.
– When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the
speakers.
⁄ Speakers
To connect the speaker cords
Release
Press and hold
Insert
Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s
main power switch again.
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have
followed the above instruction. If this happens, move the
speakers away from the TV.
• When connecting the speaker cords, match their polarity
with that of the speaker terminals: blue/red to (+) and black
to (–).
For CA-DXJ30
From right subwoofer
(red/black)
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to
each terminal.
From left subwoofer
(red/black)
• DO NOT push or pull the speakers as this
will damage the foot spacers at the bottom
of the speakers.
@ Auxiliary equipment
Red
From main left speaker
(blue/black)
Stereo audio cord
(not supplied)
White
From front right speaker
(blue/black)
¤ Voltage selector
For CA-DXJ21
Fromsubwoofer
(red/black)
(not applicable for Australian models)
Use a screwdriver to rotate the
voltage selector so that the voltage
mark is pointing to the same
voltage as where you are plugging
in the unit. (See also the back cover
page.)
From front right
speaker (blue/black)
From main left speaker
(blue/black)
For CA-DXJ1
1
Voltage mark
From left speaker (red/
black)
# Power cord
Plug the AC power cord to a wall outlet.
From right speaker (red/
black)
DO NOT plug in before setting the voltage
selector and all connection procedures are
completed.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a USB Mass storage class device Cancelling the Demonstration
Main Unit
ONLY
You can connect a USB mass storage class device such as a
USB flash memory, hard disk drive, multimedia card reader,
digital camera, etc. to this System.
2
sec.
DEMO OFF
DEMO START
USB cable
(not supplied)
To start the demonstration, select DEMO START.
Main unit
Changing the Color System and
• You cannot connect a personal computer to the
MEMORY) terminal of the System.
• When connecting with a USB cable, use the USB 2.0 cable
whose length is less than 1m.
(USB
Remote
ONLY
Scanning Mode
INFO
You can select the video output to match it to the color
system of your TV (NTSC or PAL).
• (CA-DXJ30 only) If you connect a progressive TV through
the COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality
picture by selecting progressive scanning mode.
• You can change the setting only while playback is stopped.
Preparing the Remote Control
Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the
polarrrity (+ and –) correctly.
1 Enter the color system setting mode.
For CA-DXJ11/J21
For CA-DXJ30
2
sec.
2
sec.
SCAN MODE
2 Select the color system and scanning mode.
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
PAL
PAL PROG
(CA-DXJ30 only)
When using the remote control, point the top of the
remote control toward the remote sensor as directly as
possible. If you operate it from a diagonal position, the
operating range (approx. 5 m) may be shorter.
NTSC PROG
NTSC
(CA-DXJ30 only)
• If the range of effectiveness of the remote control decreases,
replace both batteries.
NTSC / PAL
NTSC or PAL Interlaced
scanning. For a conventional
NTSC or PAL TV.
Caution:
NTSC PROG/
PAL PROG
(CA-DXJ30 only) or PAL TV.
NTSC or PAL Progressive
scanning. For a progressive NTSC
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or the like.
3 Store the setting.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Indication
The indications on the display tell you a lot of things while you are operating the System.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
e
r
t
y
1 Source signal indicators
• DTS: lights when DTS signals are detected.
DIGITAL: lights when Dolby Digital signals are
detected.
2 Karaoke operation indicators
7 Timer indicators
•
: lights when Daily Timer or Recording Timer is on
standby, is working, or being set.
•
• SLEEP: lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
• DAILY: lights when the Daily Timer is on standby;
flashes while working or being set.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer is on standby;
flashes while working or being set.
/
/
•
: lights when Mic Mixing is activated; flashes
when Karaoke Scoring is in use.
• ECHO: lights when Echo is activated.
• V.MASKING: lights when Vocal Masking is activated.
3 3D PHONIC indicator
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.
4 Disc indicators
8 Repeat mode indicators
•
P: lights when Repeat Play is activated.
• ALL: lights when All File Repeat is activated (only for
USB)
• 1 – 5: lights to indicate the current disc tray.
• ALL DISC: lights when All Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1 DISC: lights when One Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1: lights when One Track/Chapter/File/Step Repeat is
activated.
•
: lights when a disc is detected on the disc tray; rotates
during playback or pause.
5 FM reception indicators
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with
sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in
monaural.
9 Play mode indicators
• PROGRAM: lights when Program Play is activated.
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
p PG/PL indicator
6 Tape operation indicators
• TAPE: lights when a tape is loaded in either deck A or B.
• PG: lights when Original Program is selected for
DVD-VR playback.
•
(Reverse Mode): indicates the current Reverse
Mode.
• PL: lights when Play List is selected for DVD-VR
playback.
• A: lights when a tape is in deck A.
• B: lights when a tape is in deck B.
• *2 3 (tape direction):
– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
*2 indicator for deck A is available only when the
tape is being rewinded.
q Sound Mode indicators
• S.MODE: lights when one of the Sound Modes is
activated.
•
: lights when one of the Sound Modes
with surround effect is activated.
w PROGRESSIVE indicator (CA-DXJ30 only)
• Lights when the progressive scanning mode is selected.
e B.S.P. indicator (CA-DXJ30 only)
• Lights when browsable still pictures on DVD Audio are
available.
• REC: lights while recording.
r BONUS indicator (CA-DXJ30 only)
• Lights when DVD Audio with bonus group is detected.
t Main display
y USB indicator
• Lights when “USB” is selected as the source.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Playback
¥ Turn on the power.
In this manual, the operations using the remote control
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit goes off.
are mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons
and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or
similar) name and marks.
• Without pressing
AUDIO, the System also turns
on by pressing one of the source selecting buttons in
the next step.
ø Select the source.
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is
ready to start playback.
• To listen to the sound of the external component, press
FM/AM/AUX repeatedly to select “AUX” as the
source, then start playback on the external component.
1
Number
DISC 1–
DISC 5
π Adjust the volume.
RETURN
buttons
CANCEL
To turn off (standby) the System
TOP MENU/PG
MENU/PL
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit
lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always
consumed even while on standby.
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
2
FM/PLAY
MODE,
REVERSE MODE
For private listening
,
GROUP/TITLE
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the
speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before
connecting or putting on the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the
speakers again.
,
PREV./
NEXT/
FADE MUTING
SHIFT
3
DO NOT turn off (standby) the System with
the volume set to an extremely high level;
otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can
damage your hearing, speakers and/or
headphones when you turn on the System or
start playback.
1
2
How to select a number
To select 5, press 5.
To select 10, press 10.
To select 15, press 10, 1, then 5.
To select 30, press 10, 3, then 0.
To select 125, press 10, 10, 1,
2, then 5.
3
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
Adjusting the Volume
The volume level can be adjusted in 32 steps (VOLUME
MIN, VOLUME 1 – VOLUME 30, and VOLUME MAX).
1
sec.
Increases the frequency.
Decreases the frequency.
Remote control:
Main unit:
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is
tuned in, the frequency search stops.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency
changes step by step.
To manually stop the searching, press either button.
Remote
ONLY
To drop the volume in a moment
To restore the volume,
press again or adjust the
volume level.
Remote
ONLY
If the FM reception is poor
The MONO indicator lights on the
display. Reception will improve though
stereo effect is lost—monaural reception
mode.
(while holding...)
To restore the stereo effect, press the
button again (the MONO indicator goes
off).
Listening to the Radio
INFO
To select the AM tuner interval spacing
Main Unit
ONLY
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other
countries use 10 kHz spacing.
Remote
ONLY
To preset stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
1 Select “TUNER AM,” then turn off (standby) the
System.
1 Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM
preset stations if selected.
TUNER FM
TUNER AM
AUX
2 Activate the preset number entry mode.
2 Select the AM tuner interval spacing.
To select 9 kHz:
• Finish the following process while the indication on
the display is flashing.
• To cancel the operation during procedure, press
CANCEL while holding SHIFT.
3 Select a preset number for the station you store.
(while holding...)
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
To select 10 kHz:
• You can also use ¢/4 buttons.
(while holding...)
To select the band (FM/AM)
TUNER FM
TUNER AM
AUX
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Store the station.
To connect a USB mass storage class device
USB cable
(not supplied)
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
• Always set the volume to the minimum level when
connecting or disconnecting the USB mass storage class
device.
• To disconnect the USB mass storage class device safely,
turn off the System before disconnecting the device.
To play back disc/USB mass storage class
TUNER FM
TUNER AM
AUX
2 Select the preset number for the station you stored.
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
device
To start:
• You can also use ¢/4
buttons.
USB mass storage class device
Disc
Playback starts.
To pause:
To stop:
Playing Back a Disc/USB Mass Storage
To release it, press
DVD/CD 3 or
Class Device
INFO
•
USB MEMORY 3.
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc/USB mass
storage class device, make sure of the following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on
the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays.
• For disc/USB mass storage class device playback, you
can change the initial setting to your preference. See
“Setup Menu Operations” on page 37.
While playing, this System can store the stop point (not
applicable for CD). When you start playback again by
pressing DVD/CD 3 or USB MEMORY 3, it starts from
the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.
(“RESUME” appears when you stop playback.)
If “
” appears on the TV screen when you press a
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press 7
button, the disc/USB mass storage class device cannot
perform the operation you have tried to do.
twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 38.)
• For playback of AV files, see also “Operations Using the
Control Screen” on page 27.
On-screen guide icons
• During playback, the following icons may appear for a
while on the TV screen:
To insert discs
Appears at the beginning of a scene
containing multi-angle views.
Appears at the beginning of a scene
containing multi-audio languages.
Appears at the beginning of a scene
containing multi-subtitle languages.
• The following icons will also be shown on the TV screen
to indicate your current operation.
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the
disc tray.
To close the disc tray, press the same 0 button again.
• If you press # for the same tray, the disc tray closes and
playback starts automatically.
,
,
,
,
,
• To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” in “OTHERS” menu on page 38.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For DivX files, each time you press the or button, you
can skip to a scene of 30 seconds or 5 minutes away
depending on the DivX file.
To select a disc
Playback
starts.
(while holding...)
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3.
Remote
ONLY
To select a title/group
While playing...
Remote
ONLY
T
o select an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start
playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting
playback, while you can select a chapter after starting
(while holding...)
playback
.
• To select a number, see “How to select a number” on
page 8.
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
To select a chapter/track
While playing...
or
Remote
ONLY
To play back by using the disc menu
You can operate the disc play using the disc menu.
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio
1 Show the disc menu.
• The first time you press 4, you will go back to the
beginning of the current chapter/track.
• To select a number, see “How to select a number” on
page 8.
or
To locate a particular portion
• This does not function for JPEG files.
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
While playing...
• On some discs, you can also select items by entering the
number using the number buttons. To select a number, see
“How to select a number” on page 8.
• Search speed changes as above for all discs/files except for
MP3/WMA/WAV/DivX files. For MP3/WMA/WAV/
DivX files, search speed is different.
• No sound comes out if searching is carried out while
showing the moving picture.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 For SVCD/VCD with PBC
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the
display instead of the playing time.
To start playback:
To stop:
When disc menu appears on the TV screen, select an item on
the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
To rewind or fast-forward tape:
To change the tape running direction
(deck B only)
To move to the next or
previous page of the
current menu:
To return to the previous
menu:
3 (forward
2 (reverse
)
)
To reverse the tape automatically
(deck B only)
(while holding...)
To cancel PBC, press 7, then press ¢.
• You can also cancel PBC by pressing 7, then pressing the
number buttons. Playback starts with the selected track.
To reactivate PBC, press 7, then press 4.
Tape is reversed, and playback repeats until
you stop it.
Tape is not reversed. When the current side of
the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Playing Back a Tape
Tape is reversed once.
To insert a tape
You can play back type I tapes.
• The use of C-120 or longer tapes is not recommended.
Insert
Push
Close
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
Adjusting the Speaker Output
Remote Control
Remote
ONLY
Balance
You can adjust the speaker output balance.
L – 6
0
CLOCK/TIMER
DIMMER
(while holding...)
R – 6
CANCEL
Reinforcing the Bass Sound
You can adjust the Active Bass level from level 1
(minimum) to level 4 (maximum).
Initial setting: 4
INFO
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
DISPLAY
BALANCE L–R
SOUND MODE
VFP
3D PHONIC
SHIFT
ACTIVE BASS
+, –
EXT LEVEL
DVD LEVEL
VARIO BASS
• This function is not available when VARIO BASS is set to
“OFF” or headphones are plugged in.
Applying an Optimal Bass Sound Effect
–VARIO BASS
VARIO BASS function adjusts bass sound characteristics to
create a sound suitable for the playback source of your
preference.
Main unit
AUTO
(Initial setting) (Canceled)
TURBO TECHNO
OFF
LITE.n.EASY
MOVIE
VARIO BASS
AUTO
The System automatically applies
TURBO, LITE.n.EASY, MOVIE or
TECHNO according to the playback
source (initial setting).
ACTIVE BASS
EX. +,–
LITE.n.EASY
MOVIE
Suitable for Karaoke and classical
music. You can obtain a comfortable
bass sound.
Suitable for a video source and playback
of external component. You can obtain a
strong bass sound.
3D-PHONIC
TECHNO
TURBO
Suitable for disco or techno music and
playback of cassette tapes. You can
obtain a strong bouncy bass sound.
Suitable for most kinds of music and
playback of external component. You
can obtain a balanced bass sound.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select the SEA parameter you want to adjust.
1 Adjust BASS.
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Sound Modes
2 Adjust MID (Mid-range).
3 Adjust TRE (Treble).
You can select one of the preset Sound Modes.
SEA Modes
ROCK POP CLASSIC
DANCE
HALL
FLAT
STADIUM
Surround Modes*
SEA (Sound Effect Amplifier) Modes
3 Adjust the parameter.
ROCK
Boosts low and high frequency. Good for
acoustic music (initial setting).
POP
Good for music with an emphasis on
vocal.
CLASSIC
Good for classical music.
Surround Modes*
DANCE
HALL
Increases resonance and bass.
Adds depth and brilliance to the sound.
STADIUM
Adds clarity and spreads the sound, as in
an outdoor stadium.
• You can adjust the bass, mid and treble level from –3 to
+3.
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other parameters.
User Modes
USER1/2/3
Your individual mode stored in memory.
See the next column “Creating Your Own
Sound Modes—User Mode.”
4 Select one of the User Modes.
USER1
USER2
*Surround elements are added to the SEA elements to create
being-there feel in your room.
• While one of the Sound Modes is activated, S.MODE
indicator lights up.
USER3
• While one of the Sound Modes with surround effect is
activated, “
To cancel the Sound Mode, select “FLAT.”
” lights up.
5 Store the setting.
Creating Your Own Sound
Modes—User Mode
INFO
Remote
ONLY
• You can adjust the SEA pattern temporarily by doing the
operation on steps 1 to 3.
The adjustment is cleared when you change the sound
You can adjust the preset Sound Modes to create your own
Sound Modes which suit your taste. The changed settings can
be stored as the USER1, USER2 and USER3 Modes.
mode to another mode.
• To create your own Sound Mode with surround effect,
select DANCE, HALL or STADIUM first, then go through
steps 1 to 5.
While “USER1,” “USER2” or “USER3” is shown on the
display...
1
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Creating 3-Dimensional Sound
Changing the Picture Tone
Remote
While viewing a playback picture on the TV, you can select
the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own
preference.
ONLY
Field—3D Phonic
INFO
This function is available only for disc/USB mass storage
class device playback.
• This function is not available for DivX files.
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
While playing a disc/USB mass storage class device...
NORMAL
GAMMA
0
0
0
0
0
0
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
SHARPNESS
On the TV screen
ACTION
OFF
DRAMA
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
THEATER
2 Select a preset picture tone.
On the TV screen
NORMAL
USER2
CINEMA
USER1
ACTION
Suitable for action movies and sports
programs.
DRAMA
Creates natural and warm sound.
Enjoy movies in a relaxed mood.
THEATER
Enjoy sound effects like in a major
theater.
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can
Presetting Automatic DVD Video
store the settings (see below).
Remote
ONLY
Sound Increase Level
To adjust the picture tone
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower
level than other discs and sources. You can set the increase
level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you do not
have to adjust the volume when you change the source.
• This function is available only for DVD Video discs.
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
• Follow steps 1 and 2 above.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
DVD LEVEL1
DVD LEVEL2
GAMMA
Adjust if the neutral color is bright
or dark. The brightness of dark and
bright portions is maintained
(–3 to +3).
(while holding...)
DVD LEVEL3
• As the number increases, sound level also increases.
• The initial setting is “DVD LEVEL3.”
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the picture is bright or dark
as a whole (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST
Adjust if the far and near position is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or
blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT
Adjust if the human skin color is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS
Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Adjust the parameter.
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Clock
INFO
Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use any timers
except the Sleep timer.
• To exit from the clock setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as
required.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL
while holding SHIFT. You can return to the previous step.
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
To erase the VFP screen, press VFP again.
1 Activate clock setting mode.
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Display Brightness
(while holding...)
DIMMER 1 DIMMER 2
DIMMER OFF
(Canceled)
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the
button repeatedly until the clock time starts flashing.
(while holding...)
2 Adjust the hour, then minute.
DIMMER 1
DIMMER 2
Dims the display.
Dims the display more than DIMMER 1.
Now the built-in clock starts working.
Changing the display information
For “DVD/CD” and “USB MEMORY”:
Disc/file type
(while holding...)
Clock
Playback
information
For “TAPE,” “TUNER FM,” “TUNER AM” and “AUX”:
Current source
information
(while holding...)
Clock
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unique Video Disc/File Operations
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Audio Track
INFO
Remote Control
For DVD Video/DivX: While playing back a chapter/file
containing audio languages, you can select the language to
listen to.
For DVD Audio (CA-DXJ30 only): While playing back a
track containing audio channels, you can select the audio
channel to listen to.
Number
buttons
For DVD-VR/SVCD/VCD: While playing back a chapter/
track, you can select the audio channel to play.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
DVD/CD
,
SLOW
SLOW
ZOOM,
/
/
ANGLE,
AUDIO/MPX
While playing DVD Video...
Ex.:
SUB TITLE
PAGE
SHIFT
1/3
2/3
3/3
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
While playing a DVD Audio/DivX...
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
While playing a DVD-VR, SVCD or VCD...
SVCD
ST1
ST2
L2
L1
R2
R1
DVD-VR/VCD
ST
L
2
R
DVD-VR
1
ST1/ST2/ST To listen to normal stereo (2-channel)
playback.
L1/L2/L
R1/R2/R
To listen to the left audio channel.
To listen to the right audio channel.
* Example: when two multi-channel streams are recorded.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. SVCD usually uses
these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings (ST1/
ST2).
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Selecting the View Angle
For DVD Video/DVD Audio/DivX: While playing back a
chapter/file containing subtitles in different languages, you
can select the subtitle language to display on the TV screen.
For DVD-VR: While playing, you can turn the subtitle on or
off.
For DVD Video/DVD Audio only: While playing back a
chapter containing multi-view angles, you can view the same
scene from different angles.
• You can also select the view angle using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
For SVCD: While playing, the SUB TITLE button functions
even if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
• You can also select the subtitle language using the
on-screen bar (see page 24).
While playing...
While playing a DVD Video/DivX...
(while holding...)
Ex.:
1 Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
1/3
2/3
3/3
2 Select the subtitle language.
1
2
3
Ex.:
Remote
ONLY
Reviewing the Playback Quickly
1/3
2/3
3/3
For DVD Video/DVD-VR only: You can move back the
playback position by 10 seconds (only within the same
title)—Glance Back.
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing...
While playing a DVD-VR...
Remote
ONLY
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
(CA-DXJ30 only)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
For DVD Audio only: While playing back a track linked to
browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), you can select the still
picture (turn the “page”) to be shown on the TV screen.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), they
are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
• You can also select the “page” using the on-screen bar (see
page 24).
While playing an SVCD...
Each time you press the
button, the still picture
(page) changes one after
another (if available).
(while holding...)
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Advance the still picture frame by frame.
Remote
ONLY
Playing Back Bonus Group
(CA-DXJ30 only)
For DVD Audio only: Some DVD Audio discs have a
special group called “bonus group” whose contents are not
open to the public.
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3.
Slow-motion playback
• This function is available only for moving picture files
except MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/DivX.
1 Select the bonus group.
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a
bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group”
on page 11.
1 While playing...
2 Enter the key number.
Still picture appears.
2 Start slow-motion playback.
*
3 Follow the interactive instruction shown on the TV
1/32
1/32
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
screen.
To cancel the key number entry, press 7.
*Only for DVD Video.
Special Picture Playback
INFO
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
Pause playback
While playing...
Remote
ONLY
Zoom
• For JPEG/ASF files, see page 28.
Playback pauses.
While playing...
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3.
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 6
ZOOM 3
ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
Frame-by-frame playback
• This function is not available for ASF file.
1 While playing...
ZOOM OFF
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
• You can move the zoomed-in area by pressing
,
,
,
.
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly until
“ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV screen.
Playback pauses.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Playback Operations
Programming the Playing Order
Remote Control
Remote
ONLY
—Program Play
INFO
You can arrange the playing order of the chapters/tracks/
files (up to 99) before you start playback.
• Program Play cannot be used for files in a USB mass
storage class device, Video files/JPEG files on a disc and
DVD-VR.
Number
buttons
CANCEL
1 Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
,
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
DVD/CD
FM/PLAY
MODE,
,
REPEAT A-B,
REPEAT
On the display
SHIFT
PROGRAM
No Disc
1
Group/Title
Track/Chapter
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
On the TV screen
Main unit
2 Select chapters/tracks/files you want for Program
Play.
1 Select a disc number.
2 For DVDs and Audio files only: Select a group/title
number.
3 Select a track/chapter number.
• To select a number, see “How to select a number” on
page 8.
DVD/CD
3 Repeat step 2 above until you complete your program.
4 Start playback.
Playback starts in the order you have
programmed.
DISC 1
,
,
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To skip:
To pause:
To stop*:
Playing at Random—Random Play
You can play the contents of all the loaded discs at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for files in a USB mass
storage class device, Video files/JPEG files on a disc,
DVD-VR and some DVDs.
Torelease, press
DVD/CD 3.
1 Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
*Resume does not work for Program Play.
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
Remote
ONLY
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
In the reverse order.
On the display
2 Start playback.
In the programmed order.
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
Playback of the current disc starts in a random order.
When all chapters/tracks on the current disc are played,
playback of the next disc starts. Random Play ends when
all loaded discs are played.
To erase the last step:
To erase the entire
program:
To skip:
To pause:
To stop:
(while holding...)
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2 on page 20.
To go to the
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
beginning of the
current chapter/
track, press 4.
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For Program Play:
While playing or before playback...
Remote
ONLY
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play
You can repeat playback.
P 1
P ALL
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar
(See page 25. Not applicable for AV files and JPEG file.)
• For Video file/JPEG file and DVD-VR, see page 28.
• The indicator(s) lights on the display as follows to indicate
the current repeat mode.
Canceled
P 1
Repeats the current chapter/track/file.
Repeats the current title/group.
Repeats the current disc.
P
Repeat Play
•
For DVD Video:
P 1 DISC*
While playing...
P ALL DISC* Repeats all discs.
P ALL Repeats all files in a USB mass storage
P 1
Canceled
class device or all programmed chapters/
tracks/files.
P ALL DISC
*These modes may not work correctly for DVDs.
•
For DVD Audio (CA-DXJ30 only):
A-B Repeat
While playing or before playback...
You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying
the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).
• A-B Repeat cannot be used for AV files and some DVDs.
P 1
Canceled
P ALL DISC
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select
the start point (A).
•
For Audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV):
While playing or before playback...
When repeating Audio files on disc:
P 1
Canceled
P 1DISC
P ALL DISC
(while holding...)
2 Select the end point (B).
When repeating Audio files in a USB mass storage class
device:
(while holding...)
P 1
P
P ALL
• You can search for the end point using the ¡ button.
To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again.
• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or
skip the chapter or track.
Canceled
•
For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing or before playback (without PBC for SVCD/
VCD)...
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock
Main Unit
ONLY
You can lock the disc trays so that no one can
P 1
P 1DISC
eject the loaded discs.
Canceled
P ALL DISC
While on standby...
•
For Random Play:
While playing or before playback...
P 1
Canceled
P 1DISC
P ALL DISC
(while holding...)
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Operations
On-screen Bar Information
Remote control
You can check the playback information and use some
functions through the on-screen bar. (Not applicable for
Audio files and JPEG files.)
On-screen bars
DVD Video
Number
buttons
1
2
3
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
PG
PL
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
ON SCREEN
4
DVD Audio (CA-DXJ30 only)
DVD/CD
USB MEMORY
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
LPCM
DISC 2 GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:15:58
DVD-AUDIO
3/2.1ch
OFF
TRACK
PAGE
1/3
1/3
TIME
REPEAT
SHIFT
ZOOM
4
DVD-VR
1
2
Dolby D
2/0.0ch
DISC 1 PG
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 0:01:58
DVD-VR
TIME
OFF
ST
ON
4
SVCD
1
2
TRACK
TRACK
3
TIME
0:04:58
0:04:58
DISC
3
PROGRAM
SVCD
TIME
OFF
ST1
-/
4
4
VCD
1
2
DISC 4
3
TIME
VCD
TIME
PROGRAM
OFF
ST
4
CD
1
2
TRACK
3
TIME 0:04:58
DISC 5
PROGRAM
CD
TIME
OFF
4
Video file on a disc—MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/DivX file
1
5
2
3
REPEAT GROUP TIME 00:00:58
FILE
Video file in a USB mass storage class device
—MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/DivX file
5
2
REPEAT GROUP TIME 00:00:58
USB
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O
perations Using the
1 Disc type/source type
2 Playback information
Remote
ONLY
On-screen Bar
Basic operation procedures through the on-screen bar are as
follows:
INFO
Indication
Meanings
Dolby D/
Audio format
DTS/ LPCM
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video:
3/2.1 ch/
2/0.0 ch
Channel number
While a disc is selected as the source...
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
PROGRAM/ Current play mode
RANDOM
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
DVD-VIDEO
DISC
TITLE
CHAP
1
Current disc
*
2
Current title
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/ 1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
1/3
1/3
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
3
GROUP
1
Disappears
TRACK 14
* This does not appear for Video files.
Current program
Current play list
Time indications
PG
PL
2
2
2 Select (highlight) the item you want.
TOTAL1:25:58
3 Playback conditions
Indication
Meanings
Dolby D
Playback
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/ 1
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
/
/
Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
3 Display the pop-up window.
Pause
Stop
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
4 Operation icons (on the pull-down menu)
1/3
1/3 1/1
Indication
Meanings
ENGLISH
TIME
Select to change the time indication
(see also page 25).
4 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
Select to repeat playback (see also
page 25).
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
Select for time search (see also
page 26).
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
CHAP.
TRACK
1/3
Select for chapter search (see also
page 26).
5 Finish the setting.
Select for track search (see also
page 26).
Pop-up window disappears.
Select to change the audio language or
channel (see also page 17).
Select to change subtitle language (see
also page 18).
1/3
To erase the on-screen bar, press ON SCREEN again.
Select to change view angle (see also
page 18).
1/3
Select to change the page (see also
page 18).
PAGE 1/15
5 Repeat Play setting for video files (See also page 28)
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar
and the display window on the main unit.
ALL
Repeats all discs or all programmed
tracks.
A-B
Repeats a desired portion (see below).
Repeats the current title.
Repeats the current group.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD).
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
TITLE
GROUP
DISC
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).
3 Change the time indication.
CHAPTER
TRACK*
PG
Repeats the current program (for
DVD-VR only). See also page 28.
PL
Repeats the current play list (for
DVD-VR only). See also page 28.
OFF
Cancels Repeat Play.
TOTAL
T. REM
TIME*
Elapsed disc time.
*During Program Play or Random Play, “STEP”
appears.
Remaining time of the current disc/title.
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track.
5 Finish the setting.
Pop-up window disappears.
REM*
Remaining time of the current chapter/
track.
*Not applicable for DVD-VR.
Repeat Play
A-B Repeat
• For Audio files, see also page 22.
• For Video files and JPEG file, see page 28.
1 While playing a disc, display the on-screen bar with
the pull-down menu.
2 Select
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• All discs except DVD: Repeat Play can be selected
before starting playback.
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
2 Select
3 Display the pop-up window.
.
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
OFF
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
4 Select “A-B.”
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
OFF
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC
TIT
1
DVD-VIDEO
OFF
TIME
CHAP.
A–B
5 Select the start point (A).
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
H
C
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
A
-
CHAP.
1
/3
• After selecting the starting point (A), you can search for
the end point using ¡.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Select the end point (B).
A-B Repeat starts. The selected
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the number of the item to play.
For DVD Video/DVD-VR: Chapter
For DVD Audio: Track
portion plays repeatedly.
1 While playing a disc, display the on-screen bar with
the pull-down menu.
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3, and select “OFF”
in step 4.
CHAP.
TRACK
2 Select
or
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed
playing time from the beginning.
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
CHAPTER
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
_
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• All discs except DVD: Time Search can be used before
starting playback.
Examples:
To select 5, press 5.
To select 15, press 1, then 5.
To select 30, press 3, then 0.
2 Select
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
• To correct a misentry, press the number buttons until
the desired number is shown in the pop-up window.
4 Enter the time.
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
5 Finish the setting.
Examples:
To move to a point of 1 (hours):
02 (minutes): 00 (seconds), press
1, 0, 2, 0, then 0.
The System starts playing the
searched chapter or track.
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press 0,
5, 4, 0, then 0.
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0”
hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
last two digits in the examples above).
• To correct a misentry, press to erase the last entry.
5 Finish the setting.
The System starts playing from the
specified time.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control screen for AV files/JPEG files
Operations Using the Control
Screen
For DVD-VR, JPEG file and AV files: You can search for
and play the desired items through the control screen.
The control screen automatically appears on the TV screen
when the System detects Audio files on the loaded disc or
connected USB mass storage class device. (For Video files/
JPEG files; it appears when playback is stopped.)
Ex.: While playing an MP3 file on a disc.
Remote
ONLY
Control screen for DVD-VR
The control screen is superimposed on the TV screen when
you call up Original Program (PG) or Play List (PL) screens.
To select playback type
RANDOM
REPEAT STEP Time : 00:00:14
Group : 2 / 3
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
Blue
Red
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Green
Fog.mp3
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
To select the Original
Program:
To select the Play List:
Track Information
Title
Rain
Artist
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
Album
Winter sky.mp3
1 Current source
When Original Program screen is superimposed.
FILE: Current source is “DVD/CD.”
USB: Current source is “USB.”
2 Current group number/total group number
3 Current group
4 Group list
5 Current file
6 File information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV file)
7 Play mode information (RANDOM or PROGRAM.
not applicable for USB mass storage class device.)
8 Repeat Play setting
ORIGINAL PROGRAM
No Date
Ch
Time
Title
1 25/04/07 4ch 19:00
2 17/05/07 8ch 10:30
3 22/05/07 8ch 17:00
4 26/05/07 L-1 13:19
5 20/06/07 4ch 22:00
JVC DVD World 2004
Music Festival
children 001
6 25/06/07 L-1
8:23
children 002
When Play List screen is superimposed.
9 Elapsed playing time of the current file
(Not applicable for JPEG file)
PLAY LIST
0 Operation Status icon
No Date
Chap Length
Title
My JVC World
1 25/05/07 001 1:03:16
2 17/06/07 005 1:35:25
3 20/06/07 003 0:10:23
4 25/06/07 001 0:07:19
- Current file number/total number of files in the
current group (total number of files on the current
disc/USB mass storage class device)
= Highlight bar (Current selection)
~ File list
Favorite music
children001-002
• If different types of files (Audio files, Video files and
Still picture files) are recorded on a disc/USB mass
storage class device, select the file type to play (see
page 37).
1 Program/Play list number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of the
recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
To move the highlight bar between group list and file list
(only for AV files and JPEG file):
Moves the bar to the file list.
5 Title of the program/play list*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of play lists
8 Number of chapters
Moves the bar to the group list.
To select an item in the list:
Move the highlight bar to the
desired item.
9 Playback time
*The title of the original program or play list may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.
• If you move the highlight bar
while playing back DVD-VR
or Audio files, the selected item
starts playback automatically.
To remove the control screen, press ENTER/SET.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To start playback
For JPEG files:
To repeat slide-show for JPEG files
While playing or before starting playback...
• When repeating JPEG file on disc:
The selected file (still
picture) is displayed until
you change it.
(
DISC/
(
GROUP/
REPEAT DISC)
REPEAT GROUP)
Canceled
(
ALL/
(
OFF)
Slide-show playback
starts.
Each file (still picture) is
shown on the screen for a
few seconds, then changes
one after another.
REPEAT ALL)
• When repeating JPEG files in a USB mass storage class
device:
(
GROUP/
(
ALL/
REPEAT GROUP)
REPEAT ALL)
Canceled
For the other files:
(
OFF)
Playback starts with the
selected chapter/file.
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3 also
starts playback.
To repeat play for Video files
While playing or before starting playback...
• When repeating Video files on disc:
(
TRACK)
(
GROUP)
(
DISC)
REPEAT TRACK REPEAT GROUP REPEAT DISC
• Once you start viewing a JPEG file or Video file, the
control screen disappears.
• To cancel slide-show for JPEG file, and display the current
still picture, press 8.
Canceled
(
ALL)
(
OFF)
REPEAT ALL
• When repeating Video files in a USB mass storage class
device:
To stop playback
(
TRACK)
(
GROUP)
REPEAT TRACK
REPEAT GROUP
Canceled
(
ALL)
(
OFF)
REPEAT ALL
P 1
P
P 1 DISC
P ALL
Repeats the current file.
To repeat chapter/program/play list for DVD-VR
While playing or before starting playback...
For Original Program
Repeats the current group.
Repeats all files on the current disc.
Repeats all files in the USB mass storage
class device.
(
DISC)
(
PG)
(
CHAP)
P ALL DISC Repeats all loaded discs.
Canceled
(
OFF)
(
ALL)
• For Repeat Play of Audio file, see page 22.
To zoom in the JPEG/ASF file
While playing...
For Play List
• During slide-show for JPEG file, press 8 to display the still
picture, then...
(
PL)
(
CHAP)
Canceled
(
OFF)
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current program/play list.
(
ALL)
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
P 1*
P*
ZOOM OFF
P 1 DISC* Repeats all programs on the current disc.
(while holding...)
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
• You can move the zoomed-in area by pressing
P ALL
Repeats all loaded discs.
,
,
,
.
DISC
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly until “ZOOM
*Not available before starting playback.
OFF” appears on the TV screen.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Operations
Recording onto a Tape
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
Main unit
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 12.
1 Insert a recordable cassette into deck B.
Push
Insert
Close
USB
MEMORY
TAPE-B
TAPE-A
Deck A
DISC 1-5
DUBBING
USB/DISC
REC START
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
REC
START/STOP
REVERSE
MODE
Tape direction indicator
Reverse Mode indicator
Deck B
Current source
To change the direction
(forward)
3
2
(reverse)
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back
copyrighted material without the consent of the
copyright owner.
Change the Reverse Mode if necessary
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start
(
)
recording in the forward (3) direction.
To record on only one side.
3 Start playing the source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “DVD/CD,” “USB,” “TAPE-A” or
“AUX.”
• When recording from a disc/USB mass storage class
device, you can also use “Synchronized Recording”
(see page 30).
• When recording from deck A, you can also use
“Dubbing” (see “Dubbing Tapes” on page 30).
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Start recording.
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
• See step 2 of “Recording onto a Tape” on page 29.
3 Select the source you want to record.
When recording from the disc:
To stop recording
• Select the disc number you want to start recording from.
or
Dubbing Tapes
Main Unit
ONLY
When recording from the USB mass storage class device:
You can record a tape from deck A to deck B.
1 Change the source to “TAPE.”
For recording desired tracks/files from discs:
You can program tracks/files to record in your preferred
order.
Select Program Play (and make a program; see page 20)
before starting playback.
2 Insert the source cassette in deck A, and a recordable
cassette in deck B.
3 Check the tape running direction on the display.
See step 2 of “Recording onto a Tape” on page 29.
4 Start dubbing.
4 Start recording.
Playback and recording start from the
first track/file.
• The System automatically creates
4-second blank between the tunes
recorded on the tapes.
• When either playback or recording ends, both playback
and recording stop at the same time.
• When either tape playback or recording ends, both cassette
decks stop at the same time.
To stop dubbing
To record only your favorite track/file
—One Track Recording
You can specify track/file to record on the tape while
listening to a disc/USB mass storage class device.
• This function is available only for CD/VCD/SVCD/DVD
Audio and Audio files (without PBC for SVCD/VCD).
• Not available with Program Play and Random Play.
Synchronized Recording
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
While the track/file you want to record is playing...
Playback returns to the beginning of
that track/file and the track/file is
You can start and stop both playback and tape recording at
the same time.
• This function is available only for CD/VCD/SVCD/DVD
Audio/DVD Video and Audio files.
recorded on the tape. After recording,
both playback and recording stop.
• Not available with Random Play.
To cancel while recording
1 Load a disc or connect a USB mass storage class
device and insert a recordable cassette.
or
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Karaoke
Remote control
IMPORTANT
• Always set MIC LEVEL to “0” when connecting or
disconnecting the microphone.
• MIC LEVEL adjustment is valid for both microphones
connected to the MIC 1 and MIC 2 jacks.
• MIC LEVEL and MICVOL mentioned in this Instruction
Book carry the same meaning.
Number
buttons
VOCAL SUPP.
CANCEL
MIC MIX
RESERVE
VOCAL
MASKING
Source
selecting
buttons
KARAOKE SETTING
Singing Along (Karaoke)
You can enjoy singing along (Karaoke) by using one or two
microphones.
• By pressing REC START/STOP, you can record your
singing-along.
KARAOKE SCORING
KARAOKE
,
SETTING
KARAOKE
SETTING
/
/
1 Turn MIC LEVEL to “0”.
+, –
AUDIO VOL
SHIFT
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
3 Start playing a source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “DVD/CD,” “USB,” “TAPE-A,”
“TAPE-B” or “AUX.”
Main unit
• For Karaoke discs: Select a desired audio channel. See
“Selecting the Audio Track” on page 17.
4 Sing into the microphone.
5 Adjust the MIC LEVEL and VOLUME.
KARAOKE
SCORING
VOLUME –,+
To use microphone only, select “DVD/CD” or “USB” in
step 3, but do not start playback.
REC
START/STOP
To cancel the Mic Mixing
MIC LEVEL –,+
MIC 1
MIC MIX
MIC 2
MIC OFF
(Canceled)
(while holding...)
DO NOT keep the microphones
connected while they are not in use.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
Adjusting the Sound Track for Karaoke
Mic Mixing will be activated.
Remote
ONLY
INFO
• If a microphone is already connected and Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to reactivate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
You can adjust the sound track for Karaoke.
For stereo (2-channel) source: By selecting VOCAL
MASK, you can reduce the lead vocal—Vocal Masking.
For Karaoke disc: By selecting L CHANNEL or
R CHANNEL, you can select the audio channel to play.
While Mic Mixing is activated...
3 Activate Karaoke Scoring.
“KSCORE ON” appears on the display.
VOCAL MASK L CHANNEL
(while holding...)
OFF
(Canceled)
R CHANNEL
• During Karaoke Scoring, scoring will start when
playback is started.
• To cancel Karaoke Scoring before playback, press the
same button again. “KSCORE OFF” appears on the
display.
(while holding...)
4 Start playback and sing into the microphone.
VOCAL MASK
L CHANNEL
Reduce the vocal from stereo
(2-channel) source.
Karaoke Scoring starts.
• Adjust echo level and key if you want. (See “To apply
an echo to your voice” and “To adjust the key” on
page 33.)
Reproduces only the left audio channel.
R CHANNEL Reproduces only the right audio channel.
To return to normal playback, select “OFF.”
• When you press 4 or ¢, Karaoke Scoring is
canceled and restarts from the selected track/file.
After the song ends, playback stops and the score board
appears on the TV screen with fanfare.
To return to normal playback temporarily
This function allows you to recover the lead vocal
temporarily for your reference.
Ex.:
Your score
KARAOKE SCORE BOARD
While Vocal Masking, L CHANNEL or R CHANNEL is
activated...
85
POINTS
Very good!!
1
2
3
ST
93
85
73
POINTS
POINTS
POINTS
The latest
top 3
The vocal or stereo effect will be restored
temporarily.
ND
RD
8.0
kcal
The calorie you consumed in your singing
To return to Vocal Masking, L CHANNEL or
R CHANNEL, press the same button again.
• When you press 8, Karaoke Scoring is canceled. When
playback starts again, Karaoke Scoring restarts.
• If you do not sing for about 2 minutes after Karaoke
Scoring starts, Karaoke Scoring is canceled.
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill
INFO
If you sing a song too quietly for the System to detect your
voice for about 2 minutes after Karaoke Scoring starts,
Karaoke Scoring may be canceled.
This System can score your Karaoke skill by comparing your
singing along with the vocal on the playback source.
• This function is available only for disc/USB mass storage
class device playback.
• This function is not available for DVD Audio.
• It is recommended to select the soundtrack as follows (see
page 17):
For Karaoke DVD Video: Select a sound track with vocal.
For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: Select “ST,” “ST1” or “ST2.”
• After selecting a sound track, select VOCAL MASK,
• To obtain a correct scoring result, it is recommended to
sing the song completely. If the singing time is less than 3
minutes, the scoring result may be “0” or incorrect.
To stop the playback in the middle of the song, press 7.
Karaoke Scoring is not canceled and your singing along is
scored until that time.
To activate Karaoke Scoring in the middle of the song,
press KARAOKE SCORING. “SCORING” and “START”
appear on the display, then scoring starts from that point.
To deactivate Karaoke Scoring in the same song during
playback, press KARAOKE SCORING. “SCORING” and
“CANCEL” appear on the display.
• Once you deactivate Karaoke Scoring in the same song
during playback, pressing KARAOKE SCORING
switches “KSCORE ON” and “KSCORE OFF”
alternately.
• When you reactivate Karaoke Scoring in the same song
during playback and “KSCORE ON” is selected, scoring
starts from the next track.
L CHANNEL or R CHANNEL using the VOCAL
MASKING button (see above).
1 Select “DVD/CD” or “USB” as the source.
or
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To change the calculation level
Changing the Karaoke Setting
You can change five settings for Karaoke.
• To escape from Karaoke setting, wait for several seconds
after the setting is done.
You can change the scoring level of Karaoke Scoring.
• This function is available only for disc/USB mass storage
class device playback.
To apply an echo to your voice
1 Select “DVD/CD” or “USB” as the source.
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
1
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON*
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
• If a microphone is already connected and Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to reactivate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
*
FANFARE*
SCORE LVL
3
*Appears only when “DVD/CD” or “USB” is selected as
the source with Mic Mixing activated.
2 Adjust the echo level.
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON
FANFARE
SCORE LVL
4 Select the scoring level setting.
ECHO OFF
(Canceled)
ECHO 1
ECHO 5 ECHO 4
ECHO 2
ECHO 3
PRO
ECHO 6
AMATEUR
• As the number increases, echo level also increases.
Remote
PRO
Calculation level is strict.
Calculation level is lenient.
ONLY
To adjust the key
AMATEUR
• This function is available for disc/USB mass storage class
device playback.
• This function is available only for CD/VCD/SVCD/DVD
Video and Audio files.
• Key adjustment will be canceled when you deactivate Mic
Mixing, or select another disc, track or file.
Remote
ONLY
To turn on/off the fanfare
You can turn the fanfare on or off for Karaoke Scoring.
• This function is available only for disc/USB mass storage
class device playback.
1 Select “DVD/CD” or “USB” as the source.
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
1
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
• If a microphone is already connected and Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to reactivate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON
FANFARE
SCORE LVL
3 Start playback, then...
2 Select the fanfare setting.
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON
FANFARE
SCORE LVL
ON
4 Adjust the key.
OFF
(Canceled)
To raise the key (up to +6).
To lower the key (up to –6).
To return to normal key, select “0.”
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Select songs you want for Karaoke Program Play.
Press the number buttons to select a song in the following
order.
To change the mic volume
Remote
ONLY
1
1 Select a disc.
2 Select a title/group.
3 Select a chapter/track/file.
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON*
FANFARE*
SCORE LVL
*
• To select a number, see
“How to select a number”
on page 8.
*Appears only when “DVD/CD” or “USB” is selected as
the source with Mic Mixing activated.
• To cancel the procedure,
press RESERVE while
holding SHIFT. The
PROGRAM indicator
disappears.
2 Select the volume level.
6 Start playback.
• The mic volume level can be adjusted in 16 steps
(MICVOL 0 – 15).
Reserving Karaoke Songs
Karaoke Reserve screen disappears and playback starts in
the order you have programmed.
• For the Karaoke Program Play with Karaoke
Scoring: Each time the song ends, playback stops and
the score board appears. Press DVD/CD 3 to start
playback of the next track.
Remote
ONLY
—Karaoke Program Play
You can determine the playback order of the titles, chapters,
tracks or files on the disc player. You can program up to 12
steps.
• This function is not available for files in a USB mass
storage class device.
INFO
7 Sing into the microphone.
8 Adjust the MIC LEVEL and VOLUME.
1
Select “DVD/CD” as the source.
To check the programmed contents
2 Turn the MIC LEVEL to “0”.
(while holding...)
3 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC1 or MIC2 jack.
Karaoke Reserve screen appears.
• You cannot display Karaoke Reserve screen while
Karaoke Scoring is in use.
To modify the program
While Karaoke Reserve screen is shown on the TV...
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
• If a microphone is already connected and Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to reactivate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
4 Activate Karaoke Program Play.
To erase the unwanted step:
No Disc Gr/Tt Tr/Chap
1
2
3
4
5
(while holding...)
On the TV screen
• The PROGRAM indicator flashes during this mode.
(while holding...)
To erase the entire program, repeat the procedure.
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 5.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations
1 Select one of the timer setting modes—ON for
Recording Timer or Daily Timer.
Remote control
Recording Timer
Daily Timer
ON
REC TIMER
Canceled
DAILYTIMER
Clock setting
ON
(while holding...)
AUDIO
CLOCK/TIMER
SLEEP
CANCEL
2 Make the timer setting as you want.
, ,
ENTER/SET
Repeat the procedure for the following setting until
finished.
1
2
3
Set the hour then minute for on-time.
Set the hour then minute for off-time.
For Recording Timer: Select the playback
source—“TUNER-FM,” “TUNER-AM” or
“AUX.”
SHIFT
For Daily Timer: Select the playback source—
“TUNER-FM,” “TUNER-AM,” “DISC,” “USB,”
“TAPE-A,” “TAPE-B” or “AUX.”
EX.: When “TUNER-FM” is selected.
• When you select “AUX” as the source, you also
need to set the timer of the external component.
Select an item you want to play or record as
follows.
“TUNER-FM” and “TUNER-AM”: Preset station.
“DISC”: Disc, group/title and track/file/chapter.
“USB”: Group and file.
4
5
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Timer
INFO
Select the volume level.
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite
song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can
make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You cannot activate Daily Timer and Recording Timer at
the same time. (Activating either timer deactivates the
other timer.)
• You can select the volume level (“VOLUME 0” –
“VOLUME 30” and “VOLUME --”). If you select
“VOLUME --,” the volume is set to the last level
when the System has been turned off.
After making the timer setting, “SET OK” appears and your
setting items appear on the display one after another.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL
while holding SHIFT. You can return to the previous step.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Turn off the System (on standby) if you have set the
To turn on the timer again, repeat step 1 and press
ENTER/SET in step 2.
timer with the System turned on.
Remote
ONLY
Turning Off the Power Automatically
With Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep while listening to
music.
How Recording Timer works
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
When Recording Timer has been set, the timer indicator
(
) and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
10 20 30 60 90
Recording Timer works only once.
• Recording Timer starts working only when the System
is turned off (on standby).
Canceled
180 150 120
(while holding...)
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station, sets
the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.
2 Wait until the set time disappears.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
When the off-time comes
The System stops recording, and turns off (on standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
• If you press the button
repeatedly, you can change
the shut-off time.
How Daily Timer works
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer indicator
(while holding...)
(
) and DAILY indicator are lit on the display. Daily
Timer is activated at the same time everyday until the
timer is turned off manually (see below).
• Daily Timer starts working only when the System is
turned off (on standby).
Timer Priority
If Timer settings overlap, the timers work as described
below.
When the on-time comes
• Sleep Timer has priority over the Recording Timer and
Daily Timer.
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or
starts playing the specified source, and sets the volume
level gradually to the preset level after about 30 seconds.
Canceled
When the off-time comes
The System stops playback, and turns off (standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
Sleep Timer
To turn off the Timer after the setting is done
You can turn off the timer after it has been set.
The System turns off.
• Since Daily Timer works at the same time everyday, you
may need to cancel it on some particular days.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer does not work.
1 Select the timer (REC TIMER or DAILYTIMER)
Recording/Playback
Canceled
you want to cancel.
DAILY Timer
Recording Timer
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
ON
REC TIMER
Canceled
DAILYTIMER
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
Clock setting
ON
(while holding...)
Sleep Timer
2 Turn off the selected timer.
The System turns off.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer is canceled. (If
Sleep Timer shuts off the System earlier than the off time
you have set for Recording Timer, recording stops when
Sleep Timer shuts off the System.)
(while holding...)
• The timer indicator (
) goes off.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Operations
Basic Procedure
Remote Control
You can change the setting of the System.
• The setup menu can be used only when “DVD/CD” or
“USB” is selected as the source.
1 Press SET UP while playback is stopped.
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
SET UP
2 Press (or ) to select the menu.
3 Press (or ) to select the item.
4 Press ENTER/SET.
5 Press (or ) to select the options, then press
ENTER/SET.
To erase a preference display, press SET UP.
LANGUAGE menu
Item
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
Contents
You can select the initial menu language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select the initial audio language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select the initial subtitle language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select “ENGLISH,” “CHINESE,” or “SPANISH” as the on-screen language.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
PICTURE menu
Item
Contents
MONITOR TYPE
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play back picture recorded for wide-
screen televisions.
16:9
4:3 LB
16:9 NORMAL/16:9 MULTI NORMAL (Wide television screen): Select this when the aspect ratio
of your wide TV is fixed to 16:9.
16:9 AUTO/16:9 MULTI AUTO (Wide television screen): Select this when your TV is an ordinary
wide TV.
4:3 PS
4:3 LB/4:3 MULTI LB (Letter Box conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. Displays a wide-
screen picture to fit the width of the TV screen keeping the aspect ratio.
4:3 PS/4:3 MULTI PS (Pan Scan conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. The picture is zoomed
in to fill the screen vertically and the left and right sides of the picture are cut off.
• By selecting “MULTI” mode, the color system of the System changes automatically to match the
color system of the picture. For the color system setting, see page 6.
PICTURE SOURCE
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting the type of the video source.
AUTO: Normally, select this option. The System recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of
the current picture according to its information.
FILM: For a film source picture.
VIDEO: For a video source picture.
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
You can set the screen saver function to ON or OFF.
ON: The on-screen display becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.
OFF: To cancel the screen saver.
You can select a file type to play.
AUDIO: To play Audio files. (MP3/WMA/WAV files.)
STILL PICTURE: To play Still Picture files. (JPEG file.)
VIDEO: To play Video files. (MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/DivX files.)
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO menu
Item
Contents
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
Set this item correctly when using the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal on the rear.
PCM ONLY: When connecting to audio equipment which is compatible with only linear PCM
signals.
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM: When connecting to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with built-in
Dolby Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: When connecting to a DTS/MPEG Audio decoder or an amplifier with built-in
DTS/MPEG Audio decoder.
DOWN MIX
This setting is effective for digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM
ONLY.”
DOLBY SURROUND: Select this when connecting a surround decoder.
STEREO: Select this when connecting a stereo receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing Dolby Digital software.
AUTO: Select to apply the compression only to multi-channel encoded audio (except for 1-channel
and 2-channel sources.)
ON: Select this to always apply the compression.
OTHERS menu
Item
Contents
RESUME
You can select Resume.
ON: The System resumes playback from the position where playback has been stopped (not applicable
for CD).
OFF: Resume is deactivated.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
DivX REGISTRATION
Activate or deactivate the on-screen guide.
ON: Activate the on-screen guide.
OFF: Deactivate the on-screen guide.
The System has its own Registration Code.
If necessary, you can confirm it.
Once you have played back a DivX file in which the Registration Code is recorded, the System’s
Registration Code is overwritten for copyright protection.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the TV
You can operate JVC’s TV using the remote control supplied
for this System.
Remote control
To turn on or To select the input mode (either TV or
off the TV:
VIDEO):
TV
TV/VIDEO
(while holding...)
To adjust TV volume:
(while holding...)
TV CH +,–
SHIFT
TV VOL +,–
To select the TV channel:
(while holding...)
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
– While playing back a file in a USB mass storage class
Learning More about This System
device, do not disconnect the device. It may cause a
malfunction of both the System and the device.
– JVC bears no responsibility for any loss of data in the
USB mass storage class device while using this System.
– When connecting with a USB cable, use the cable whose
length is less than 1 m.
– This System is compatible with USB 2.0 Full Speed.
– You can play back the following types of files in a USB
mass storage class device (maximum data transfer rate: 2
Mbps):
Connections (see pages 3 to 6)
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode:
• If you play back an NTSC disc/file with the color system
set to “PAL (PROG*),” the disc/file will be reproduced
using “PAL 60” format; however, if the TV does not
support this format, the screen may not display properly.
• If you play back a PAL disc/file with the color system set
to “NTSC (PROG*),” you can watch the playback pictures,
but the following symptoms may occur:
– Audio: MP3, WMA, WAV
– The items on the menu will be blurred, and be shown
slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the
original aspect ratio.
– Still picture: JPEG
– Video: MPEG-1, MPEG-2, ASF, DivX (maximum
frame rate of 30 fps for progressive)
– This System may not play back some files even though
their formats are listed above.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
* PAL PROG and NTSC PROG are available only for
CA-DXJ30.
CA-DXJ30 only
• You cannot change the scanning mode to progressive in the
following cases:
– When your TV does not support the progressive video
input.
– When you have not connected your TV to the unit using
a component video cord.
• When you play back an NTSC disc/file in progressive
scanning mode (either NTSC PROG/PAL PROG), the
System outputs the NTSC signal regardless of the color
system settings.
– You cannot play back a file larger than 2 Gigabyte.
– When playing a file which has a high transfer rate, frames
or sounds may be dropped during playback.
– This System cannot recognize a USB mass storage class
device whose rating is other than 5 V and does not exceed
500 mA.
– This System may not play back some USB mass storage
class devices and does not support DRM (Digital Rights
Management).
– It will take some time to start up a Digital Audio Player
(DAP) larger than 1 Gigabyte.
– You cannot send any data to your USB mass storage
class device from this System.
• For MP3/WMA/WAV playback...
Daily Operations—Playback (see pages 8 to 12)
Listening to the Radio:
– MP3/WMA/WAV discs require a longer readout time
than regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the
group/file configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA/WAV files cannot be played back and
will be skipped. This results from their recording
processes and conditions.
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number,
the previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the preset stations may be erased in a few days. If
this happens, preset the stations again.
Playing Back a Disc/USB Mass Storage Class Device:
• When you change the source to “DVD/CD” or “USB,” it
may take a while to activate the source.
– When making MP3/WMA/WAV discs, use ISO 9660
Level 1 or Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA/WAV files with
the extension code <.mp3>, <.wma> or <.wav>
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you make each MP3/WMA/
WAV files at the following conditions:
• While the System is reading a disc, the source may not
change to “USB” correctly. In this case, press 7, then
reactivate “USB” as the source.
– MP3/WMA: At a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and bit
rate of 128 kbps.
– WAV: 44.1 kHz/16 bit Linear PCM.
– This System cannot play back files made at bit rate of
less than 64 kbps.
• On some discs/files, the actual operations may be different
from what is explained in this manual, due to the
programming and disc structure; such differences are not a
malfunction of this System.
• For playback of files in the USB mass storage class
device...
• For DVD-VR playback...
–
Original Program: The System can play back the
original picture in the recorded order.
– When connecting a USB mass storage class device, refer
also to its manual.
–
Play List: The System can play back the play list edited
by the recording equipment.
– Connect one USB mass storage class device to the
System at a time. Do not use a USB hub.
– For details about DVD-VR format and play list, refer to
the manual of the recording equipment.
– You cannot charge any other USB device through the
(USB MEMORY) terminal of this System.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For JPEG playback...
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
(see pages 13 to 16)
Reinforcing the Bass Sound:
• You cannot adjust the Active Bass level when the
– This System can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg> or <.jpeg> (regardless of the letter case—
upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of
more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be
shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files*.
Progressive JPEG files* or lossless JPEG files* cannot
be played.
headphones are connected.
Applying an Optimal Bass Sound Effect–VARIO BASS:
• If you plug in a microphone and Mic Mixing is activated,
the System will automatically switches the mode to
LITE.n.EASY even if the mode is set to OFF.
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode:
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the User Mode settings may be erased in a few
days. If this happens, set the User Modes again.
* Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras,
web, etc.
Progressive JPEG format:Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used
now.
Creating 3-dimensional Sound Field—3D Phonic:
• While you use the headphones, 3D Phonic is canceled
temporarily.
• For MPEG-1/MPEG-2 playback...
– This System can play back MPEG-1/MPEG-2 files with
the extension code <.mpg> or <.mpeg> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
– The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
– 720 x 576 pixels (25 fps)/720 x 480 pixels (30 fps) is
recommended for the highest resolution.
– This System also supports the resolutions of 352 x 576/
480 x 576/352 x 288 pixels (25 fps) and 352 x 480/480 x
480/352 x 240 pixels (30 fps).
– 3D Phonic is also applied to the optical digital output
signals through the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT
terminal.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this
happens, reset the clock.
Unique Video Disc/File Operations (see pages 17
to 19)
– The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
– Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or MPEG2 Audio Layer-2.
Selecting the Audio Track:
• On some disc/file, you cannot change audio languages
while playing back.
Special Picture Playback:
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be
reproduced.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
• For ASF playback...
– This System can play back ASF files with the extension
code <.asf> (regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– This System supports ASF files whose resolution is
352 x 288 pixels or less.
– Some recorded files may not be able to played back
depending on file characteristics, kind of digital still/
video cameras, or recording conditions.
• For DivX playback...
– The System supports DivX 6.x, 5.x, 4.x and 3.11.
– When making a disc, use the UDF-Bridge format.
“Multi-border” is not supported.
– The System supports DivX files whose resolution is 720
x 480 pixels or less (30 fps), and 720 x 576 pixels or less
(25 fps).
Advanced Playback Operations (see pages 20
to 22)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
– While programming steps...
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program
an item number that does not exist on the disc (for
example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12
tracks).
– For SVCD/VCD/CD loaded on the other tray than the
current one, the System may prompt for the group
number entry as well; however, these entries will be
ignored during playback.
• The programmed contents will remain until you erase it.
• While the PROGRAM indicator is on, you cannot change
the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control and
DISC 1 – 5 # on the main unit do not work.)
– Audio stream should conform to Dolby Digital, MPEG1
Audio Layer- 2 or MPEG Audio Layer-3 (MP3).
– This System can play back DivX files with the extension
code <.divx> <.div> <.avi> (regardless of the letter
case—upper/lower).
– The System does not support GMC (Global Motion
Compression).
– The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode may
not be played back correctly.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• While the System is turned off, connecting a microphone
does not activate Mic Mixing and any other Karaoke
related function. In this case, press MIC MIX while
holding SHIFT after turning the System on.
Adjusting the Sound Track for Karaoke:
• The Vocal Masking setting is not applied to the optical
digital output signals through the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal.
On-Screen Operations (see pages 23 to 28)
Operations Using the On-screen Bar:
• A-B Repeat is possible only within the same title or within
the same track.
Recording Operations (see pages 29 to 30)
General:
• You cannot change the source during recording.
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the
start and the end of cassette tapes. Thus, before recording,
wind the leader tape first to ensure that the recording will
be made without any music part lost.
• If no cassette is inserted or a protected tape has been
inserted, “NO REC” appears on the display.
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus,
you can make sound adjustments. without affecting the
recording level.
• On some music, Vocal Masking does not provide the
correct effect.
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill:
• You can also activate Karaoke Scoring while playing back.
In this case, the scoring starts from that point.
But cancel Karaoke Scoring and set Karaoke Scoring again
in the same track during the playback, scoring starts from
next track.
• While Karaoke Scoring is in use, you cannot deactivate
Mic Mixing or use MIC MIX, RESERVE and number
buttons.
• Activating Karaoke Scoring cancels Repeat Play.
• You cannot use Karaoke Scoring during Program Play,
Random Play, or recording. However, you can turn
Karaoke Scoring on and off by using
KARAOKE SCORING button during these play modes.
• The ranking (top 3) is cleared when you turn off the
System.
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play:
• You can use RESERVE button when a microphone is
plugged in. However, you can cancel Karaoke Program
Play using the button even if a microphone is not plugged
in. In case you reactivate Karaoke Program Play, plug in a
microphone.
• If you have selected a disc tray on which a disc containing
Video files or JPEG file or DVD-VR is loaded, that disc
number is skipped.
• If DVD-VR or a disc containing Video files and JPEG file
is loaded on the current tray, you cannot activate Karaoke
Program Play.
• When the track starts playback, that track number will be
erased from the Karaoke Reserve screen (the programmed
contents will remain until you erase it).
Recording onto a Tape:
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in
the forward (3) direction first; otherwise, recording will
stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
• While recording onto a tape using USB/DISC REC
START button, plugging in or out headphones may cause
sound distortion and affect the recording.
Synchronized Recording:
• You cannot open the disc tray while recording onto a tape
using USB/DISC REC START button.
• Recording starts from the first track even if you have
selected a track by using 4/¢. To specify track(s) to
record, program them (not applicable for USB mass
storage class device) or use One Track Recording.
• While recording, you cannot use disc/USB mass storage
class device operation buttons (except for 7).
• You cannot use Repeat Play during synchronized
recording (Repeat Play will be canceled).
• USB/DISC REC START button does not work:
– While playback is paused.
– When Random Play mode is selected.
– When playing back in Program Play mode.
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction (3)
during recording, the last song will be re-recorded at the
beginning of the reverse side (2).
• When the tape reaches its end in the reverse side (2)
during recording, recording stops even though the disc/
USB mass storage class device is not entirely recorded.
• While the PROGRAM indicator is flashing, you cannot
change the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control
and DISC 1 – 5 # on the main unit do not work.)
• For some VCD, the Karaoke Scoring result may not appear
at the end of the track if PBC is activated. In this case, press
7 to view your scoring result.
Enjoying Karaoke (see pages 31 to 34)
General:
• While recording onto a tape, Key adjustment, Echo and
Vocal Masking will be recorded. However, while
recording onto a tape using USB/DISC REC START, Key
adjustment will not be recorded.
• While the System is turned on, connecting a microphone
automatically activates Mic Mixing and all the Karaoke
related functions.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations (see pages 35 to 36)
Setting the Timer:
Handling cassette tapes
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by
inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in
the cassette.
• If you do not specify the preset station or track number
correctly while setting a timer, the currently selected
station or the first track will be played when timer is
activated.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the
clock first, then the timer again.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty
places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or
speaker, or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality:
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the
heads, capstans and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and
audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System is
turned off).
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the
source while Recording Timer is recording.
• Daily Timer will not work correctly for some DVDs.
Setup Menu Operations (see pages 37 to 38)
General:
• If the upper and lower parts of the menu are cut off, adjust
the picture size control of the TV.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back
to protect from unexpected erasure or re-
recording.
To protect your recording, remove these
tabs.
LANGUAGE menu:
• When the language you have selected for MENU
LANGUAGE, AUDIO LANGUAGE, or SUBTITLE is
not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the
initial language.
To re-record on a protected tape, cover
the holes with adhesive tape.
PICTURE menu—MONITOR TYPE:
• Even if “4:3 PS/4:3 MULTI PS” is selected, the screen size
may become 4:3 letter box with some disc. This depends on
how they are recorded.
• When you select “16:9 NORMAL/16:9 MULTI
NORMAL” or “16:9 AUTO/16:9 MULTI AUTO” for a
picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly
changes due to the process for converting the picture width.
OTHERS menu—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• The setup menu and on-screen bar will be displayed (and
recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zoom-in always appear on
the display regardless of this setting.
Cleaning the System
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System
is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean
with a dry cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become
damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the
following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
– DO NOT wipe it forcefully.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as
insecticides to it.
– DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact
for a long time.
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs,
tapes and mechanism clean.
Handling discs
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at the edge
while pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc when
placing it back in its case.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, extreme temperatures,
and moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list
for a possible solution before calling for service.
] The disc is scratched or dirty.
The playback sounds strange.
] Cancel Vocal Masking (see page 32).
] Cancel Key adjustment (see page 33).
No subtitle appears on the TV screen though you have
selected the initial subtitle language.
] Some discs are programmed to always display no
subtitle initially. If this happens, press SUB TITLE after
starting play (see page 18).
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before
you finish.
] There is a time limit. Repeat procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
] The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to
external electrical interference. Unplug the AC power
cord and then plug it back in.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
] The path between the remote control and the remote
sensor on the System is blocked.
Audio language is different from the one you have
selected as the initial audio language.
] Some discs/files are programmed to always use the
original language initially. If this happens, press AUDIO/
MPX after starting play (see page 17).
The disc tray does not open or close.
] The AC power cord is not plugged in.
] Child Lock is in use. “LOCKED” appears on the display
window (see page 22).
] The batteries are exhausted.
No sound is heard.
] Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
] Program Play is in use. Cancel Program Play (see
] Headphones are connected.
page 21).
No picture appears on the screen.
] The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV screen, the picture is
blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.
] The System is connected to a TV which does not support
progressive video input.
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
] Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off
while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
Recording Operations:
“CANNOT REC” appears on the display.
] The System cannot perform recording.
Impossible to record.
] Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed.
Cover the holes with adhesive tape.
] Karaoke Scoring is in use. Cancel the Karaoke Scoring
(see page 32).
] Incorrect color system is selected (see page 6).
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the
screen.
] Select “4:3 LB /4:3 MULTI LB” for “MONITOR
TYPE” (see page 37).
Radio Operations:
Hard to hear broadcasts because of noise.
] Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
] The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
] The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Karaoke Operations:
Karaoke function cannot be activated.
] Ensure at least 1 microphone is connected and Mic
Mixing is activated. If a microphone is not connected,
you cannot activate Mic Mixing and any other Karaoke
related function.
Karaoke Scoring function cannot be activated.
] You cannot use Karaoke Scoring while recording, or
while the disc menu for DVD Video/SVCD/VCD is
shown on the TV screen.
Scoring result seems wrong (or “– –” appears).
] The time of the playback and singing along are too short
for Karaoke Scoring. It is recommended to sing more
than 3 minutes to obtain a correct scoring result.
] No sound from the microphone or the input level (MIC
LEVEL) is too low.
Disc/file Operations:
The disc does not play.
] You have inserted a DVD Video whose Region Code is
not correct. (“REGION ERR” appears on the display.)
] The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the
label side up.
ID3 Tag on an MP3 disc cannot be shown.
]
There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
Groups and files are not played back as you expect.
] The playing order is determined when the files were
recorded. It depends on the application.
AV files are not played back.
] The disc or USB mass storage class device includes
different types of files (Audio file, Video file and Still
picture file.). In this case, you can play back the files
selected only by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see page 37).
] You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after the
System read the disc or the USB mass storage class
device. In this case, reload the disc or disconnect the
USB mass storage class device and connect it again.
] You have sung too quietly.
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer or Recording Timer does not work.
] The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Output Signals
Playback disc/file
DVD Video
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
PCM ONLY
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 96 kHz, Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DVD Audio (CA-DXJ30 only)
with 48/96/192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz, 16/20/
24 bit Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DVD-R/-RW in DVD-VR format
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
Dolby Digital bitstream
with Dolby Digital
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DTS bitstream
MP3/WMA/WAV/MPEG-1/
MPEG-2 disc/file
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DivX disc/file
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with MP2, MP3
with Dolby Digital
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit
Linear PCM
32 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
Dolby Digital bitstream
ASF disc/file
* While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Code List
AA Afar
FA Persian
FI Finnish
FJ Fiji
FO Faroese
FY Frisian
GA Irish
GD Scots Gaelic
GL Galician
GN Guarani
GU Gujarati
HA Hausa
HI Hindi
KM Cambodian
KN Kannada
KO Korean (KOR)
KS Kashmiri
KU Kurdish
KY Kirghiz
LA Latin
LN Lingala
LO Laothian
LT Lithuanian
LV Latvian, Lettish RW Kinyarwanda
OC Occitan
OM (Afan) Oromo
OR Oriya
SV Swedish
SW Swahili
TA Tamil
TE Telugu
TG Tajik
AB Abkhazian
AF Afrikaans
AM Ameharic
AR Arabic
AS Assamese
AY Aymara
AZ Azerbaijani
BA Bashkir
BE Byelorussian
BG Bulgarian
BH Bihari
PA Panjabi
PS Pashto, Pushto
PT Portuguese
QU Quechua
RM Rhaeto-Romance TK Turkmen
RN Kirundi
TH Thai
TI
Tigrinya
TL Tagalog
TN Setswana
TO Tonga
TR Turkish
TS Tsonga
TT Tatar
TW Twi
UK Ukrainian
UR Urdu
RO Rumanian
MG Malagasy
MI Maori
SA Sanskrit
SD Sindhi
SG Sangho
BI
Bislama
HR Croatian
BN Bengali, Bangla HY Armenian
MK Macedonian
ML Malayalam
MN Mongolian
MO Moldavian
MR Marathi
MS Malay (MAY)
MT Maltese
MY Burmese
NA Nauru
BO Tibetan
BR Breton
CA Catalan
CO Corsican
CY Welsh
DA Danish
DZ Bhutani
EL Greek
IA Interlingua
IE Interlingue
IK Inupiak
SH Serbo-Croatian
SI
Singhalese
SL Slovenian
SM Samoan
SN Shona
SO Somali
SQ Albanian
SR Serbian
SS Siswati
ST Sesotho
SU Sundanese
IN Indonesian
UZ Uzbek
IS
IW Hebrew
JI Yiddish
Icelandic
VI
Vietnamese
VO Volapuk
WO Wolof
XH Xhosa
YO Yoruba
ZU Zulu
JW Javanese
KA Georgian
KK Kazakh
EO Esperanto
ET Estonian
EU Basque
NE Nepali
NL Dutch
NO Norwegian
KL Greenlandic
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Amplifier section
USB storage section
Output Power:
USB specification:
Compatible device:
Compatible file system:
Bus power supply:
Compatible with USB 2.0 Full Speed
Mass storage class
FRONT SPEAKERS: (for CA-DXJ30)100 W per channel, min.
RMS, driven into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than
10% total harmonic distortion.
FAT 16, FAT 32
5 V/500 mA
(for CA-DXJ21)120 W per channel, min. RMS,
driven into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10%
total harmonic distortion.
(for CA-DXJ11)125 W per channel, min. RMS,
driven into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10%
total harmonic distortion.
Cassette deck section
Frequency response
Normal (type I):
Wow and flutter:
50 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
SUBWOOFERS:(for CA-DXJ30)100 W per channel, min. RMS,
driven into 6 Ω at 63 Hz with no more than 10%
total harmonic distortion.
General
Power requirement:
AC 110 V / AC 127 V / AC 220 V /
(for CA-DXJ21)120 W, min. RMS, driven into
6 Ω at 63 Hz with no more than 10% total
harmonic distortion.
AC 230 V – AC 240 V
, (adjustable
with the voltage selector), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
For Australia:
AC 240 V
, 50 Hz
Digital output:
Power consumption:
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
CA-DXJ11: 95 W (at operation) / 15 W (on standby)
CA-DXJ21: 140 W (at operation) / 16 W (on standby)
CA-DXJ30: 170 W (at operation) / 21 W (on standby)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 185 mm x 370 mm x 372 mm
Digital input:
(USB MEMORY)
Audio input sensitivity/Impedance
(Measured at 1 kHz, with tape recording signal 300 mV)
AUX:
MIC1/2:
400 mV/47 kΩ
Mass (approx.):
CA-DXJ11: 8.9 kg
CA-DXJ21: 9.3 kg
CA-DXJ30: 9.5 kg
3.0 mV/50 kΩ
VIDEO OUT:
Color system:
CA-DXJ30: NTSC/NTSC PROG
/PAL/PAL PROG
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
CA-DXJ11/CA-DXJ21: NTSC/PAL
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Y (luminance)
C (chrominance, burst)
NTSC
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
“MLP Lossless”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS 2.0+Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
DTS, Inc.
PAL
CA-DXJ30 only: COMPONENT (Interlace/Progressive):
(Y)
(PB/PR)
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Speaker Terminals: 6 Ω − 16 Ω (front speakers/subwoofers)
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
Tuner section
FM tuning range:
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
®
• “Official DivX Ultra Certified product” “Plays all versions of
AM (MW) tuning range:
531 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz)
530 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz)
531 kHz – 1 602 kHz (at 9 kHz)
530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz)
®
®
®
DivX video (including DivX 6) with enhanced playback of
®
DivX media files and the DivX Media Format” “DivX, DivX
Ultra Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc.
and are used under licence.”
For Saudi Arabia:
Disc/File player section
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
• USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS
PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGING IN PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITIES.
Region codes:
Middle East:
2
3
South East Asia:
Central and South America, Australia: 4
Playable disc:
DVD Video/DVD Audio (CA-DXJ30
only)/CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (MP3/WMA/WAV/
JPEG/MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/DivX
format)
DVD-R/-RW (DVD-VR/DVD-video/
MP3/WMA/WAV/JPEG/MPEG-1/
MPEG-2/ASF/DivX format)
+R/+RW (DVD-video/MP3/WMA/
WAV/JPEG/MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/
DivX format)
(CA-DXJ30 only)
• “CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE
ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE
OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS,
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE
CONNECTION TO THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’
OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR
TV SET COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND
625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER
SERVICE CENTER.”
DVD-ROM (DVD-video/MP3/WMA/
WAV/JPEG/MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF/
DivX format)
MP3/WMA/WAV/JPEG/MPEG-1/
MPEG-2/ASF/DivX format
80 dB
500 lines
Immeasurable
Playable file:
Dynamic range:
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts Index
Remote control
Button
Page
10, 22,
11, 30
30
Button
Page
0
#
DISC1–5
DISC1–5
8
^
+
USB/DISC
REC START
_
4
30
Button
Page
Button
Page
31, 34
11, 27
24 – 26
6
AUDIO
a
s
w
c
r
e
8, 36
MIC MIX
MENU/PL
ON SCREEN
6
j
k
b
TV
39
DUBBING
USB
MEMORY
8, 10
#
7
10, 12, 21
9, 11, 12, 19
11, 21
#
@#
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
7
%
8, 12, 30
8, 12, 29, 30
9
VARIO BASS
=
!
13
¡
¢
8
1
4
,
NTSC/PAL
(DX-J10/20)
VOLUME
8, 31
,
TUNING +,– § ¶
10, 19, 21
PAGE
(CA-DXJ30)
i
18
z
8
18
PREV., NEXT
REPEAT
r
y
y
12
Remote control
1
,
,
,
6, 11, 14 –16,
18, 21, 24 – 28,
34, 35, 37
22, 28
22
,
REPEAT A-B
ENTER/SET
Number
buttons
1
8 – 12, 19, 20, RESERVE
7
3
z
34
26, 34
a
RETURN
12
2
3
4
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
s
d
3D PHONIC
i
m
15
13
REVERSE
MODE
12, 29
ACTIVE
BASS EXT
LEVEL + , –
6
SCAN MODE
(CA-DXJ30)
b
6
f
9
7
g
h
ANGLE
t
t
n
u
5
d
18
SET UP
SHIFT
9
o
37
5
6
7
10
10
AUDIO/MPX
AUDIO VOL+,–
BALANCE L-R
CANCEL
17
9, 11, 15, 16,
18 – 22, 28, 31,
32, 34 – 36, 39
j
9
8
9
p
q
w
e
13
21, 34,36
16, 35, 36
SLEEP
4
c
u
v
l
/
7
m
n
f
p
36
k
l
/
z
x
CLOCK/
TIMER
SLOW
9
,
(
19
SOUND MODE
SUB TITLE
TAPE A
14
DIMMER
DISC 1–5
DISPLAY
g
2
k
q
;
b
16
11
16
18
8, 12
8, 12
11, 27
39
r
t
y
u
c
v
2 3
TAPE B
3
DVD/CD
8, 10, 20, 21, 28, 32 TOP MENU/PG
b
n
DVD LEVEL
15
9
TV CH + , –
TV VOL + , –
TV/VIDEO
USB
FADE
MUTING
39
i
o
;
39
m
FM/AM/AUX
x
e
8, 9, 10
8, 10, 28
,
32
3
MEMORY
FM/PLAY
MODE
9, 20, 21
VOCAL
9
f
32
MASKING
GROUP/
TITLE
r
j
h
11
VOCAL
SUPP.
32
KARAOKE
SCORING
32
VARIO BASS
VFP
;
b
v
13
Main unit
KARAOKE
SETTING
33, 34
15
ZOOM
19, 28
KARAOKE
SETTING + , –
8
33, 34
Main unit
Button
Page
8, 36
7
Button
Page
11
2
3
∞
Disc trays
1
5
@
~
#
Display
DVD/CD
8, 10
8, 9
32
7
10, 12, 21
FM/AM/AUX
¡
¢
8
1
4
,
§ ¶ 9, 11, 12, 19
£ ¢ 11, 21
KARAOKE
SCORING
,
6
*
10, 19, 21
6, 10
MIC 1 , MIC 2
MIC LEVEL
PHONES
-
0
(
31
31
8
(USB
memory)
terminal
PRESET +, – £ ¢ 10
0
3D-PHONIC
™
15
PUSH OPEN
9 & 12, 29
ACTIVE
BASS EX. +,–
# $ 13
REVERSE
MODE
¡
12, 29
DEMO
∞
6
REC START/
STOP
)
30
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,
Canada, and U.K.)
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line
voltage corresponds with the position of the voltage selector
switch provided on the outside of this equipment and, if
different, reset the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a
damage or risk of fire/electric shock.
Excluding Australian model
EN
0108WMKMDCJMM
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM
DX-J21
—Consists of CA-DXJ21, SP-DXJ21F, and SP-DXJ21W
SUPER VIDEO
For Customer Use:
Enter below the Model No. and Serial
No. which are located either on the rear,
bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No.
Serial No.
INSTRUCTIONS
GVT0244-008A
[J]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings, Cautions and Others
Mises en garde, précautions et indications diverses
For U.S.A.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to section 820-40 of the NEC which
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION:
Excessive sound pressure from earphones or headphones
can cause hearing loss.
ATTENTION:
Une pression acoustique excessive des écouteurs ou du
casque d’écoute peut entraîner une perte auditive.
ATTENTION
Afin d’éviter tout risque d’électrocution, d’incendie, etc.:
1. Ne pas enlever les vis ni les panneaux et ne pas ouvrir le
coffret de l’appareil.
2. Ne pas exposer l’appareil à la pluie ni à l’humidité.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover or cabinet. There are
no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing
to qualified service personnel.
CAUTION
The
button in any position does not disconnect the
mains line.
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off
completely (the STANDBY lamp goes off).
The MAINS plug or an appliance coupler is used as the
disconnect device, the disconnect device shall remain
readily operable.
• When the system is on standby, the STANDBY lamp
lights red.
• When the system is turned on, the STANDBY lamp
goes off.
3. CAUTION:
Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when
open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL,
PLACED INSIDE THE UNIT.
IMPORTANT POUR PRODUITS LASER
1. PRODUIT LASER CLASSE 1
2. ATTENTION: N’ouvrez pas le couvercle supérieur ni le
coffret de l’appareil. Il n’y a aucune pièce réparable par
l’utilisateur à l’intérieur de l’appareil; confiez toute
réparation à un personnel qualifié.
The power can be remote controlled.
ATTENTION
La touche
, dans n’importe quelle position, ne
3. ATTENTION:
déconnecte pas le système du secteur.
Déconnectez la fiche de secteur pour mettre l’appareil
complètement hors tension (le témoin STANDBY
s’éteint).
La fiche secteur ou un coupleur est utilisé comme
dispositif de déconnexion de l’appareil, et l’appareil
déconnecté doit être prêt à être utilisé.
• Quand le système est en attente, le témoin STANDBY
est allumé en rouge.
Rayonnement laser visible et/ou invisible de classe 1M
une fois ouvert. Ne pas regarder directement avec des
instruments optiques.
4. REPRODUCTION DE L’ÉTIQUETTE: ÉTIQUETTE
DE PRÉCAUTION PLACÉE À L’INTERIEUR DE
L’APPAREIL.
• Quand le système est sous tension, le témoin
STANDBY s’éteint.
L’alimentation peut être télécommandée.
G-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION!
CAUTION:
To avoid personal injury or accidentally dropping the
unit, have two persons unpack, carry, and install the unit.
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get
out.)
ATTENTION!
Pour éviter toute blessure personnelle ou toute chute
accidentelle de l’appareil, celui-ci doit être déballé,
transporté et installé par deux personnes.
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems
must be considered and local rules or laws governing
the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping
or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such
as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
23.2 kg/52 lbs
ATTENTION:
• Ne bloquez pas les orifices ou les trous de ventilation.
(Si les orifices ou les trous de ventilation sont bloqués
par un journal un tissu, etc., la chaleur peut ne pas être
évacuée correctement de l’appareil.)
[European Union only]
[Union européenne seulement]
• Ne placez aucune source de flamme nue, telle qu’une
bougie, sur l’appareil.
• Lors de la mise au rebut des piles, veuillez prendre en
considération les problèmes de l’environnement et
suivre strictement les règles et les lois locales sur la
mise au rebut des piles.
• N’exposez pas cet appareil à la pluie, à l’humidité, à un
égouttement ou à des éclaboussures et ne placez pas
des objets remplis de liquide, tels qu’un vase, sur
l’appareil.
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
Attention: Aération correcte
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent
damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front:No obstructions and open spacing.
Pour prévenir tout risque de décharge électrique ou
d’incendie et éviter toute détérioration, installez l’appareil
de la maniére suivante:
2. Sides/Top/Back:No obstructions should be placed in the
areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom:Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate
1. Avant: Bien dégagé de tout objet.
2. Côtés/dessus/dessous: Assurez-vous que rien ne bloque
les espaces indiqués sur le schéma ci-dessous.
air path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height 3. Dessous: Posez l’appareil sur une surface plane et
of 10 cm (3-15/16”) or more.
horizontale. Veillez à ce que sa ventilation correcte puisse
se faire en le plaçant sur un support d’au moins dix
centimétres de hauteur.
Front
Face
Side
Côté
Wall or obstructions
Mur, ou obstruction
10 cm
(3-15/16")
10 cm
(3-15/16")
Wall or obstructions
Mur, ou obstruction
15 cm
(5-15/16")
10 cm
10 cm
(3-15/16")
(3-15/16")
CA-DXJ21
CA-DXJ21
10 cm
(3-15/16")
G-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Note on Region Code
Playable Disc/File Types
INFO
DVD Video players and DVD Video discs have their own
Region Code numbers. This system can play back DVD
Video discs whose Region Code numbers include “1.”
COMPACT
SUPER VIDEO
DIGITAL VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO
The “√” in the list below shows available disc/file types.
Audio formats
Media type
The System can play back the following digital audio
formats.
Recording format
CD-R/ DVD-R/
USB mass
*1
-RW
-RW, +R/ storage class
•
LPCM (Linear PCM),
DTS (Digital Theater Systems), MPEG Audio
DIGITAL (Dolby Digital),
*
2
+RW
—
—
√
device
—
• Multi-channel sound will be downmixed into 2-channels.
To enjoy multi-channel sound, connect a compatible
decoder or an amplifier with a compatible decoder to the
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal on the rear.
CD-DA (normal CD)
VCD/SVCD
DVD Video
√
√
—
—
—
*3
DVD-VR
—
√
—
Audio file:
How to Read This Manual
• Button and control operations are explained in the table
below.
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
MP3/WMA/WAV
Video file:
MPEG-1/MPEG-2/
ASF
√
√
•
Some related tips and notes are explained later in the
sections “Learning More about This System” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section
Still picture file:
JPEG
explaining the operations (
indicates that the
INFO
*1 Recorded with “ISO 9660” format.
*2 Recorded with “UDF-Bridge” format.
*3 Not applicable for +R/+RW.
content has some information).
Indicates that you press the button briefly.
In addition to the above discs/files, this System can play
back audio data recorded on CD-Extra and DVD/CD Text.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD-RAM, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo CD and CD-G
(CD-Graphics).
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage
the speakers.
Indicates that you press the button briefly
and repeatedly until an option you want is
selected.
Indicates that you press one of the buttons.
• This System cannot play back DVD-VR disc with CPRM
(Content Protection for Recordable Media).
• DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
Indicates that you press and hold the button
for a specified period.
The number inside the arrow indicates the
period of a press (in the example, 2 seconds).
2sec.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used
for AV file operations.
• It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (DVD Video
format only) discs.
Indicates that you turn the control toward the
specified direction(s).
Caution for DualDisc playback:
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the remote control.
Remote
ONLY
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the main unit.
Main Unit
ONLY
About color system
This System accommodates both NTSC and PAL system
and can play back discs/files recorded in either system.
To change the color system, see page 6.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions
Contents
Connections....................................................................................3
Connecting a USB Mass storage class device ............................6
Preparing the Remote Control ....................................................6
Canceling the Demonstration......................................................6
Changing the Color System........................................................6
Display Indication .........................................................................7
Daily Operations—Playback........................................................8
Adjusting the Volume.................................................................9
Listening to the Radio.................................................................9
Playing Back a Disc/USB Mass Storage Class Device ............10
Playing Back a Tape .................................................................12
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments.......................13
Adjusting the Speaker Output Balance.....................................13
Reinforcing the Bass Sound......................................................13
Applying an Optimal Bass Sound Effect—VARIO BASS ......13
Selecting the Sound Modes.......................................................14
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode......................14
Creating 3-Dimensional Sound Field—3D Phonic ..................15
Presetting Automatic DVD Video
Installation
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to
prevent internal heat build-up in the System.
DO NOT install the System in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor
too cold—between 5°C and 35°C (41˚F and 95˚F).
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference
with the TV.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always
pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Sound Increase Level............................................................15
Changing the Picture Tone .......................................................15
Changing the Display Brightness .............................................16
Setting the Clock.......................................................................16
Unique Video Disc/File Operations ...........................................17
Selecting the Audio Track ........................................................17
Selecting the Subtitle Language ...............................................18
Selecting the View Angle .........................................................18
Reviewing the Playback Quickly..............................................18
Special Picture Playback...........................................................19
Advanced Playback Operations.................................................20
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play.....................20
Playing at Random—Random Play..........................................21
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play............................................22
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock....................................22
On-Screen Operations ................................................................23
On-screen Bar Information.......................................................23
Operations Using the On-screen Bar ........................................24
Operations Using the Control Screen .......................................27
Recording Operations.................................................................29
Recording onto a Tape..............................................................29
Dubbing Tapes..........................................................................30
Synchronized Recording...........................................................30
Enjoying Karaoke .......................................................................31
Singing Along (Karaoke)..........................................................31
Adjusting the Sound Track for Karaoke...................................32
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill......................................................32
Changing the Karaoke Setting..................................................33
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play ................34
Timer Operations........................................................................35
Setting the Timer ......................................................................35
Turning Off the Power Automatically......................................36
Timer Priority ...........................................................................36
Setup Menu Operations..............................................................37
Operating the TV ........................................................................39
Additional Information...............................................................40
Learning More about This System............................................40
Troubleshooting........................................................................44
Specifications............................................................................47
Parts Index ..................................................................................48
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with
wet hands.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense in the lenses on the System in the
following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm
place.
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case,
leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture
evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Internal heat
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the System.
Poor ventilation could overheat and damage the System.
–A cooling fan is inside the System to prevent heat
build-up.
DO NOT block the ventilation openings or
holes. If they are blocked by a newspaper or
cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System,
unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before
operating any further.
DO NOT disassemble the System since there
are no user serviceable parts inside.
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended
period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall
outlet.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and
consult your dealer.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Do not connect the AC power cord until all other
connections have been made.
Supplied accessories
• FM antenna (x1)
• AM loop antenna (x1)
• Composite video cord (x1)
• Remote control (x1)
• Batteries (x2)
• Connect VIDEO OUT directly to the video input of your
TV. Connecting VIDEO OUT to a TV via a VCR may
interfere with your viewing when playing back a copy-
protected source. Connecting VIDEO OUT to an integrated
TV/VCR system may interfere with your viewing.
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
~ From the video input of TV/monitor
See page 4.
Ÿ From the digital input of digital audio
component
See page 4.
! From AM/FM antenna
See page 4.
⁄ From the analog audio output of auxiliary
equipment (VCR, etc.)
See page 5.
@
From the speakers and the subwoofer
See page 5.
¤ To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all
connections are complete.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ TV/monitor
! AM/FM antenna
To assemble the AM loop antenna
Composite video
cord (supplied)
S-Video cord
(not supplied)
• Connect the VIDEO jack or S-VIDEO jack; whichever
you want to use.
– You can get better picture quality by connecting with S
To connect AM/FM antenna
• If the antenna cord is covered with vinyl on the tip, twist and
pull the vinyl off to remove.
video cord.
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn until the best reception is
Ÿ Digital audio component
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
obtained.
Optical digital cord
(not supplied)
Protective cap
• Set “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” in the “AUDIO” menu
correctly according to the connected digital audio
equipment (see page 38).
• The digital signal through the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal is transmitted only when “DVD/CD” is
selected as the source.
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain the best
reception.
For better FM reception
FM outdoor antenna
(not supplied)
• Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect an
outdoor FM antenna using a 75 Ω wire with coaxial type
connector.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords or the power cord. Also, keep
the antennas away from metallic parts of the System,
connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause
poor reception.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Use only speakers with the same speaker impedance as
indicated by the speaker terminals on the rear of the System.
• The main speakers and subwoofer are magnetically shielded
to avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed
properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to
the following when installing the speakers.
– When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the
speakers.
⁄ Auxiliary equipment
Red
Stereo audio cord
(not supplied)
White
Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s
main power switch again.
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have
followed the above instruction. If this happens, move the
speakers away from the TV.
@ Speakers and the subwoofer
To connect the speaker cords
• When connecting the speaker cords, match their polarity
with that of the speaker terminals: blue/red to (+) and black
to (–).
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to
each terminal.
• DO NOT push or pull the speakers as this
will damage the foot spacers at the bottom
of the speakers.
¤ Power cord
Press and hold
Insert
Release
Plug the AC power cord to a wall outlet.
From main right speaker (blue/
black)
From main left speaker (blue/
black)
From the subwoofer (red/black)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a USB Mass storage class device Canceling the Demonstration
Main Unit
ONLY
You can connect a USB mass storage class device such as a
USB flash memory, hard disk drive, multimedia card reader,
digital camera, etc. to this System.
2
sec.
DEMO OFF
DEMO START
USB cable
(not supplied)
To start the demonstration, select DEMO START.
Main unit
Remote
ONLY
INFO
Changing the Color System
You can select the video output to match it to the color
system of your TV (NTSC or PAL).
• You cannot connect a personal computer to the
MEMORY) terminal of the System.
• When connecting with a USB cable, use the USB 2.0 cable
whose length is less than 1 m (3.3 ft).
(USB
• You can change the setting only while playback is stopped.
Preparing the Remote Control
Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the
polarity (+ and –) correctly.
1 Enter the color system setting mode.
2
sec.
2 Select the color system.
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
When using the remote control, point the top of the
remote control toward the remote sensor as directly as
possible. If you operate it from a diagonal position, the
operating range (approx. 5 m/16.4 ft) may be shorter.
3 Store the setting.
• If the range of effectiveness of the remote control decreases,
replace both batteries.
Caution:
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or the like.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Indication
The indications on the display tell you a lot of things while you are operating the System.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 p
q
w
e
1 Source signal indicators
• DTS: lights when DTS signals are detected.
DIGITAL: lights when Dolby Digital signals are
detected.
2 Karaoke operation indicators
7 Timer indicators
•
: lights when Daily Timer or Recording Timer is on
standby, is working, or being set.
•
• SLEEP: lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
• DAILY: lights when the Daily Timer is on standby;
flashes while working or being set.
/
/
•
: lights when Mic Mixing is activated; flashes
when Karaoke Scoring is in use.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer is on standby;
flashes while working or being set.
8 Repeat mode indicators
• ECHO: lights when Echo is activated.
• V.MASKING: lights when Vocal Masking is activated.
3 3D PHONIC indicator
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.
4 Disc indicators
•
P: lights when Repeat Play is activated.
• ALL: lights when All File Repeat is activated (only for
USB)
• 1 – 5: lights to indicate the current disc tray.
• ALL DISC: lights when All Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1 DISC: lights when One Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1: lights when One Track/Chapter/File/Step Repeat is
activated.
•
: lights when a disc is detected on the disc tray; rotates
during playback or pause.
5 FM reception indicators
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with
sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in
monaural.
9 Play mode indicators
• PROGRAM: lights when Program Play is activated.
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
p PG/PL indicator
6 Tape operation indicators
• TAPE: lights when a tape is loaded in either deck A or B.
• PG: lights when Original Program is selected for
DVD-VR playback.
•
(Reverse Mode): indicates the current Reverse
Mode.
• PL: lights when Play List is selected for DVD-VR
playback.
• A: lights when a tape is in deck A.
• B: lights when a tape is in deck B.
• *2 3 (tape direction):
– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
*2 indicator for deck A is available only when the
tape is being rewinded.
q Sound Mode indicators
• S.MODE: lights when one of the Sound Modes is
activated.
•
: lights when one of the Sound Modes
with surround effect is activated.
w Main display
e USB indicator
• Lights when “USB” is selected as the source.
• REC: lights while recording.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Playback
¥ Turn on the power.
In this manual, the operations using the remote control
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit goes off.
are mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons
and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or
similar) name and marks.
• Without pressing
AUDIO, the System also turns
on by pressing one of the source selecting buttons in
the next step.
ø Select the source.
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is
ready to start playback.
• To listen to the sound of the external component, press
FM/AM/AUX repeatedly to select “AUX” as the
source, then start playback on the external component.
1
Number
DISC 1–
DISC 5
π Adjust the volume.
RETURN
buttons
CANCEL
To turn off (standby) the System
TOP MENU/PG
MENU/PL
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit
lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always
consumed even while on standby.
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
2
FM/PLAY
MODE,
REVERSE MODE
For private listening
,
GROUP/TITLE
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the
speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before
connecting or putting on the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the
speakers again.
,
PREV./
NEXT/
FADE MUTING
SHIFT
3
DO NOT turn off (standby) the System with
the volume set to an extremely high level;
otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can
damage your hearing, speakers and/or
headphones when you turn on the System or
start playback.
1
2
How to select a number
To select 5, press 5.
To select 10, press 10.
To select 15, press 10, 1, then 5.
To select 30, press 10, 3, then 0.
To select 125, press 10, 10, 1,
2, then 5.
3
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To preset stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
Adjusting the Volume
The volume level can be adjusted in 32 steps (VOLUME
MIN, VOLUME 1 – VOLUME 30, and VOLUME MAX).
1 Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM
preset stations if selected.
Remote control:
Main unit:
2 Activate the preset number entry mode.
• Finish the following process while the indication on the
display is flashing.
• To cancel the operation during procedure, press
CANCEL while holding SHIFT.
Remote
ONLY
To drop the volume in a moment
To restore the volume,
press again or adjust the
volume level.
3 Select a preset number for the station you store.
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
• You can also use ¢/4 buttons.
(while holding...)
Listening to the Radio
INFO
To select the band (FM/AM)
TUNER FM
TUNER AM
4 Store the station.
AUX
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
To tune in to a preset station
1
sec.
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
Increases the frequency.
Decreases the frequency.
TUNER FM
TUNER AM
AUX
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is
tuned in, the frequency search stops.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency
changes step by step.
2 Select the preset number for the station you stored.
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
• You can also use ¢/4
buttons.
To manually stop the searching, press either button.
Remote
ONLY
If the FM reception is poor
The MONO indicator lights on the
display. Reception will improve though
stereo effect is lost—monaural reception
mode.
To restore the stereo effect, press the
button again (the MONO indicator goes
off).
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To play back disc/USB mass storage class
device
To start:
Playing Back a Disc/USB Mass Storage
Class Device
INFO
•
USB mass storage class device
Disc
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc/USB mass
storage class device, make sure of the following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on
the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays.
• For disc/USB mass storage class device playback, you
can change the initial setting to your preference. See
“Setup Menu Operations” on page 37.
Playback starts.
To pause:
To stop:
If “
” appears on the TV screen when you press a
button, the disc/USB mass storage class device cannot
perform the operation you have tried to do.
To release it, press
DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3.
• For playback of AV files, see also “Operations Using the
Control Screen” on page 27.
To insert discs
While playing, this System can store the stop point (not
applicable for CD). When you start playback again by
pressing DVD/CD 3 or USB MEMORY 3, it starts from
the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.
(“RESUME” appears when you stop playback.)
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press 7
twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 38.)
On-screen guide icons
• During playback, the following icons may appear for a
while on the TV screen:
• When using an 8 cm (3-3/16 inches) disc, place it on the
inner circle of the disc tray.
To close the disc tray, press the same 0 button again.
• If you press # for the same tray, the disc tray closes and
playback starts automatically.
Appears at the beginning of a scene
containing multi-angle views.
Appears at the beginning of a scene
containing multi-audio languages.
To connect a USB mass storage class device
Appears at the beginning of a scene
containing multi-subtitle languages.
USB cable
(not supplied)
• The following icons will also be shown on the TV screen
to indicate your current operation.
,
,
,
,
,
• To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” in “OTHERS” menu on page 38.
• Always set the volume to the minimum level when
connecting or disconnecting the USB mass storage class
device.
• To disconnect the USB mass storage class device safely,
turn off the System before disconnecting the device.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3.
To select a disc
Remote
ONLY
Playback
starts.
T
o select an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start
playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting
playback, while you can select a chapter after starting
(while holding...)
playback
.
Remote
ONLY
To select a title/group
While playing...
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
(while holding...)
• To select a number, see “How to select a number” on
page 8.
Remote
ONLY
To play back by using the disc menu
You can operate the disc play using the disc menu.
To select a chapter/track
While playing...
7 For DVD Video
1 Show the disc menu.
or
or
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
• The first time you press 4, you will go back to the
beginning of the current chapter/track.
• To select a number, see “How to select a number” on
page 8.
To locate a particular portion
• This does not function for JPEG files.
• On some discs, you can also select items by entering the
number using the number buttons. To select a number, see
“How to select a number” on page 8.
While playing...
• Search speed changes as above for all discs/files except for
MP3/WMA/WAV files. For MP3/WMA/WAV files,
search speed is different.
• No sound comes out if searching is carried out while
showing the moving picture.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 For SVCD/VCD with PBC
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the
display instead of the playing time.
To start playback:
To stop:
When disc menu appears on the TV screen, select an item on
the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
• To select a number, see “How to
select a number” on page 8.
To rewind or fast-forward tape:
To change the tape running direction
(deck B only)
To move to the next or
previous page of the
current menu:
To return to the previous
menu:
3 (forward
2 (reverse
)
)
To reverse the tape automatically
(deck B only)
(while holding...)
To cancel PBC, press 7, then press ¢.
• You can also cancel PBC by pressing 7, then pressing the
number buttons. Playback starts with the selected track.
To reactivate PBC, press 7, then press 4.
Tape is reversed, and playback repeats until
you stop it.
Tape is not reversed. When the current side of
the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Playing Back a Tape
Tape is reversed once.
To insert a tape
You can play back type I tapes.
• The use of C-120 or longer tapes is not recommended.
Insert
Push
Close
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
Adjusting the Speaker Output
Remote Control
Remote
ONLY
Balance
You can adjust the speaker output balance.
L – 6
0
CLOCK/TIMER
DIMMER
(while holding...)
R – 6
CANCEL
Reinforcing the Bass Sound
You can adjust the Active Bass level from level 1
(minimum) to level 4 (maximum).
Initial setting: 4
INFO
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
DISPLAY
BALANCE L–R
SOUND MODE
VFP
3D PHONIC
SHIFT
ACTIVE BASS
+, –
EXT LEVEL
DVD LEVEL
VARIO BASS
• This function is not available when VARIO BASS is set to
“OFF” or headphones are plugged in.
Applying an Optimal Bass Sound Effect
—VARIO BASS
VARIO BASS function adjusts bass sound characteristics to
create a sound suitable for the playback source of your
preference.
Main unit
AUTO
(Initial setting) (Canceled)
TURBO TECHNO
OFF
LITE.n.EASY
MOVIE
VARIO BASS
AUTO
The System automatically applies
TURBO, LITE.n.EASY, MOVIE or
TECHNO according to the playback
source (initial setting).
ACTIVE BASS
EX. +,–
LITE.n.EASY
MOVIE
Suitable for Karaoke and classical
music. You can obtain a comfortable
bass sound.
Suitable for a video source and playback
of external component. You can obtain a
strong bass sound.
3D-PHONIC
TECHNO
TURBO
Suitable for disco or techno music and
playback of cassette tapes. You can
obtain a strong bouncy bass sound.
Suitable for most kinds of music and
playback of external component. You
can obtain a balanced bass sound.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select the SEA parameter you want to adjust.
1 Adjust BASS.
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Sound Modes
2 Adjust MID (Mid-range).
3 Adjust TRE (Treble).
You can select one of the preset Sound Modes.
SEA Modes
ROCK POP CLASSIC
DANCE
HALL
FLAT
STADIUM
Surround Modes*
SEA (Sound Effect Amplifier) Modes
3 Adjust the parameter.
ROCK
Boosts low and high frequency. Good for
acoustic music (initial setting).
POP
Good for music with an emphasis on
vocal.
CLASSIC
Good for classical music.
Surround Modes*
DANCE
HALL
Increases resonance and bass.
Adds depth and brilliance to the sound.
STADIUM
Adds clarity and spreads the sound, as in
an outdoor stadium.
• You can adjust the bass, mid and treble level from –3 to
+3.
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other parameters.
User Modes
USER1/2/3
Your individual mode stored in memory.
See the next column “Creating Your Own
Sound Modes—User Mode.”
4 Select one of the User Modes.
USER1
USER2
*Surround elements are added to the SEA elements to create
being-there feel in your room.
• While one of the Sound Modes is activated, S.MODE
indicator lights up.
USER3
• While one of the Sound Modes with surround effect is
activated, “
To cancel the Sound Mode, select “FLAT.”
” lights up.
5 Store the setting.
Creating Your Own Sound Modes
Remote
ONLY
—User Mode
• You can adjust the SEA pattern temporarily by doing the
operation on steps 1 to 3.
The adjustment is cleared when you change the sound
INFO
You can adjust the preset Sound Modes to create your own
Sound Modes which suit your taste. The changed settings can
be stored as the USER1, USER2 and USER3 Modes.
mode to another mode.
• To create your own Sound Mode with surround effect,
select DANCE, HALL or STADIUM first, then go through
steps 1 to 5.
While “USER1,” “USER2” or “USER3” is shown on the
display...
1
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Creating 3-Dimensional Sound
Field—3D Phonic
This function is available only for disc/USB mass storage
class device playback.
Changing the Picture Tone
While viewing a playback picture on the TV, you can select
the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own
preference.
INFO
To select a preset picture tone
While playing a disc/USB mass storage class device...
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
GAMMA
0
0
0
0
0
0
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
SHARPNESS
ACTION
OFF
DRAMA
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
On the TV screen
THEATER
On the TV screen
2 Select a preset picture tone.
ACTION
Suitable for action movies and sports
programs.
NORMAL
USER2
CINEMA
USER1
DRAMA
Creates natural and warm sound.
Enjoy movies in a relaxed mood.
THEATER
Enjoy sound effects like in a major
theater.
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
Suitable for a movie source.
Presetting Automatic DVD Video
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can
Remote
store the settings (see page 16).
ONLY
Sound Increase Level
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower
level than other discs and sources. You can set the increase
level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you do not
have to adjust the volume when you change the source.
• This function is available only for DVD Video discs.
DVD LEVEL1
DVD LEVEL2
(while holding...)
DVD LEVEL3
• As the number increases, sound level also increases.
• The initial setting is “DVD LEVEL3.”
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the picture tone
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Clock
INFO
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
• Follow steps 1 and 2 on page 15.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use any timers
except the Sleep timer.
• To exit from the clock setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as
required.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL
while holding SHIFT. You can return to the previous step.
1 Activate clock setting mode.
GAMMA
Adjust if the neutral color is bright
or dark. The brightness of dark and
bright portions is maintained
(–3 to +3).
(while holding...)
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the picture is bright or dark
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the
button repeatedly until the clock time starts flashing.
as a whole (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST
Adjust if the far and near position is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
2 Adjust the hour, then minute.
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or
blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT
Adjust if the human skin color is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS
Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
Now the built-in clock starts working.
3 Adjust the parameter.
Changing the display information
For “DVD/CD” and “USB MEMORY”:
Disc/file type
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
To erase the VFP screen, press VFP again.
(while holding...)
Clock
Playback
information
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Display Brightness
DIMMER 1 DIMMER 2
For “TAPE,” “TUNER FM,” “TUNER AM” and “AUX”:
DIMMER OFF
(Canceled)
Current source
information
(while holding...)
(while holding...)
Clock
DIMMER 1
DIMMER 2
Dims the display.
Dims the display more than DIMMER 1.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unique Video Disc/File Operations
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Audio Track
INFO
Remote Control
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD-VR/SVCD/VCD: While playing back a chapter/
track, you can select the audio channel to play.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
, ,
,
While playing DVD Video...
Ex.:
DVD/CD
,
SLOW
SLOW
ZOOM,
/
/
1/3
2/3
3/3
ANGLE,
AUDIO/MPX
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
SUB TITLE
SHIFT
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
While playing a DVD-VR, SVCD or VCD...
SVCD
ST1
ST2
L2
L1
R2
R1
DVD-VR/VCD
ST
L
2
R
DVD-VR
1
ST1/ST2/ST To listen to normal stereo (2-channel)
playback.
L1/L2/L
R1/R2/R
To listen to the left audio channel.
To listen to the right audio channel.
* Example: when two multi-channel streams are recorded.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. SVCD usually uses
these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings (ST1/
ST2).
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Selecting the View Angle
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle
language to display on the TV screen.
For DVD Video only: While playing back a chapter
containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene
from different angles.
For DVD-VR: While playing, you can turn the subtitle on or
off.
• You can also select the view angle using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
For SVCD: While playing, the SUB TITLE button functions
even if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
• You can also select the subtitle language using the
on-screen bar (see page 24).
While playing...
While playing a DVD Video...
(while holding...)
Ex.:
1 Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
1/3
2/3
3/3
2 Select the subtitle language.
1
2
3
Ex.:
Remote
ONLY
Reviewing the Playback Quickly
1/3
2/3
3/3
For DVD Video/DVD-VR only: You can move back the
playback position by 10 seconds (only within the same
title)—Glance Back.
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing...
While playing a DVD-VR...
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
While playing an SVCD...
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Slow-motion playback
Special Picture Playback
INFO
• This function is available only for moving picture files
except MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF.
Pause playback
While playing...
1 While playing...
Playback pauses.
Still picture appears.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3.
2 Start slow-motion playback.
Frame-by-frame playback
• This function is not available for ASF file.
1 While playing...
*
1/32
1/32
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
Playback pauses.
2 Advance the still picture frame by frame.
*Only for DVD Video.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
Remote
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3.
ONLY
Zoom
• For JPEG/ASF files, see page 28.
While playing...
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 6
ZOOM 3
ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
ZOOM OFF
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
• You can move the zoomed-in area by pressing
,
,
,
.
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly until
“ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV screen.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Playback Operations
Programming the Playing Order
Remote Control
Remote
ONLY
—Program Play
INFO
You can arrange the playing order of the chapters/tracks/
files (up to 99) before you start playback.
• Program Play cannot be used for files in a USB mass
storage class device, Video files/JPEG files on a disc and
DVD-VR.
Number
buttons
CANCEL
1 Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
,
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
DVD/CD
FM/PLAY
MODE,
,
REPEAT A-B,
REPEAT
On the display
SHIFT
PROGRAM
No Disc
1
Group/Title
Track/Chapter
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
On the TV screen
Main unit
2 Select chapters/tracks/files you want for Program
Play.
1 Select a disc number.
2 For DVDs and Audio files only: Select a group/title
number.
3 Select a track/chapter number.
• To select a number, see “How to select a number” on
page 8.
DVD/CD
3 Repeat step 2 above until you complete your program.
4 Start playback.
Playback starts in the order you have
programmed.
DISC 1
,
,
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To skip:
To pause:
To stop*:
Playing at Random—Random Play
You can play the contents of all the loaded discs at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for files in a USB mass
storage class device, Video files/JPEG files on a disc,
DVD-VR and some DVDs.
Torelease, press
DVD/CD 3.
1 Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
*Resume does not work for Program Play.
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
Remote
ONLY
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
In the reverse order.
On the display
2 Start playback.
In the programmed order.
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
Playback of the current disc starts in a random order.
When all chapters/tracks on the current disc are played,
playback of the next disc starts. Random Play ends when
all loaded discs are played.
To erase the last step:
To erase the entire
program:
To skip:
To pause:
To stop:
(while holding...)
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2 on page 20.
To go to the
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
beginning of the
current chapter/
track, press 4.
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For Program Play:
While playing or before playback...
Remote
ONLY
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play
You can repeat playback.
P 1
P ALL
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar
(except when playing back AV files or JPEG files). For on-
screen operations, see page 25.
Canceled
• For Video file/JPEG file and DVD-VR, see page 28.
• The indicator(s) lights on the display as follows to indicate
the current repeat mode.
P 1
Repeats the current chapter/track/file.
Repeats the current title/group.
Repeats the current disc.
P
Repeat Play
P 1 DISC*
•
For DVD Video:
P ALL DISC* Repeats all discs.
P ALL Repeats all files in a USB mass storage
While playing...
P 1
class device or all programmed chapters/
tracks/files.
Canceled
P ALL DISC
*These modes may not work correctly for DVDs.
•
For Audio files (MP3/WMA/WAV):
A-B Repeat
While playing or before playback...
You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying
the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).
• A-B Repeat cannot be used for AV files and some DVDs.
When repeating Audio files on disc:
P 1
P 1DISC
P ALL DISC
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select
Canceled
the start point (A).
When repeating Audio files in a USB mass storage class
device:
P 1
P
P ALL
(while holding...)
Canceled
2 Select the end point (B).
•
For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing or before playback (without PBC for SVCD/
VCD)...
(while holding...)
• You can search for the end point using the ¡ button.
To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again.
• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or
skip the chapter or track.
P 1
Canceled
P 1DISC
P ALL DISC
•
For Random Play:
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock
You can lock the disc trays so that no one can
Main Unit
ONLY
While playing or before playback...
eject the loaded discs.
P 1
P 1DISC
While on standby...
P ALL DISC
Canceled
(while holding...)
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Operations
On-screen Bar Information
Remote control
You can check the playback information and use some
functions through the on-screen bar (except when playing
back Audio files or JPEG files).
On-screen bars
DVD Video
Number
buttons
1
2
3
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
PG
PL
, , , ,
4
ENTER/SET
ON SCREEN
DVD-VR
1
2
3
3
3
3
DVD/CD
USB MEMORY
Dolby D
2/0.0ch
DISC 1 PG
CHAP.
2
CHAP
TRACK
TRACK
3
TOTAL 0:01:58
DVD-VR
TIME
OFF
ST
ON
REPEAT
SHIFT
ZOOM
4
SVCD
1
2
3
TIME
0:04:58
0:04:58
DISC
-/
3
PROGRAM
OFF
SVCD
TIME
ST1
4
4
VCD
1
2
DISC 4
3
TIME
VCD
PROGRAM
TIME
OFF
ST
4
CD
1
2
TRACK
3
TIME 0:04:58
DISC 5
PROGRAM
CD
TIME
OFF
4
Video file on a disc—MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF file
1
5
2
3
REPEAT GROUP TIME 00:00:58
FILE
Video file in a USB mass storage class device
—MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF file
5
2
REPEAT GROUP TIME 00:00:58
USB
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O
perations Using the
1 Disc type/source type
2 Playback information
Remote
ONLY
On-screen Bar
Basic operation procedures through the on-screen bar are as
follows:
INFO
Indication
Meanings
Dolby D/
Audio format
DTS/ LPCM
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video:
3/2.1 ch/
2/0.0 ch
Channel number
While a disc is selected as the source...
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
PROGRAM/ Current play mode
RANDOM
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
DVD-VIDEO
DISC
1
Current disc
*
TITLE
2
Current title
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/ 1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
1/3
1/3
Current chapter
Current program
Current play list
Time indications
CHAP
PG
3
2
Disappears
PL
2
* This does not appear for Video files.
TOTAL1:25:58
2 Select (highlight) the item you want.
3 Playback conditions
Indication
Meanings
Playback
/
/
Forward/Reverse search
Dolby D
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/ 1
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
Pause
Stop
3 Display the pop-up window.
4 Operation icons (on the pull-down menu)
Indication
Meanings
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
TIME
Select to change the time indication
(see also page 25).
1/3
1/3 1/1
ENGLISH
Select to repeat playback (see also
page 25).
4 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
Select for time search (see also
page 26).
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
CHAP.
1/3
Select for chapter search (see also
page 26).
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
Select to change the audio language or
channel (see also page 17).
5 Finish the setting.
Select to change subtitle language (see
also page 18).
1/3
Pop-up window disappears.
Select to change view angle (see also
page 18).
1/3
5 Repeat Play setting for video files (See also page 28)
To erase the on-screen bar, press ON SCREEN again.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar
and the display window on the main unit.
ALL
Repeats all discs or all programmed
tracks.
A-B
Repeats a desired portion (see below).
Repeats the current title.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD).
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
TITLE
DISC
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
CHAPTER
TRACK*
PG
2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).
3 Change the time indication.
Repeats the current program (for
DVD-VR only). See also page 28.
PL
Repeats the current play list (for
DVD-VR only). See also page 28.
OFF
Cancels Repeat Play.
*During Program Play or Random Play, “STEP”
appears.
TOTAL
T. REM
TIME*
Elapsed disc time.
Remaining time of the current disc/title.
5 Finish the setting.
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track.
Pop-up window disappears.
REM*
Remaining time of the current chapter/
track.
*Not selectable for DVD-VR.
A-B Repeat
Repeat Play
• For Audio files, see also page 22.
• For Video files and JPEG file, see page 28.
1 While playing a disc, display the on-screen bar with
the pull-down menu.
2 Select
3 Display the pop-up window.
.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• All discs except DVD: Repeat Play can be selected
before starting playback.
Dolby D
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
3
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
2 Select
.
OFF
3 Display the pop-up window.
4 Select “A-B.”
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC
TIT
1
DVD-VIDEO
OFF
OFF
TIME
CHAP.
A–B
5 Select the start point (A).
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
H
C
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
A
-
CHAP.
1
/3
• After selecting the starting point (A), you can search for
the end point using ¡.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Select the end point (B).
A-B Repeat starts. The selected
Chapter Search
For DVD Video/DVD-VR only: You can search for the
chapter number to play.
portion plays repeatedly.
1 While playing a disc, display the on-screen bar with
the pull-down menu.
CHAP.
2 Select
.
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3, and select “OFF”
in step 4.
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
3
DVD-VIDEO
Time Search
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
CHAPTER
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
_
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed
playing time from the beginning.
4 Enter the desired chapter number.
Examples:
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• All discs except DVD: Time Search can be used before
starting playback.
To select 5, press 5.
To select 15, press 1, then 5.
To select 30, press 3, then 0.
2 Select
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
• To correct a misentry, press the number buttons until
the desired number is shown in the pop-up window.
4 Enter the time.
5 Finish the setting.
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
Examples:
The System starts playing the
searched chapter.
To move to a point of 1 (hours):
02 (minutes): 00 (seconds), press
1, 0, 2, 0, then 0.
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press 0,
5, 4, 0, then 0.
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0”
hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
last two digits in the examples above).
• To correct a misentry, press to erase the last entry.
5 Finish the setting.
The System starts playing from the
specified time.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control screen for AV files/JPEG files
Operations Using the Control
Screen
For DVD-VR, JPEG file and AV files: You can search for
and play the desired items through the control screen.
The control screen automatically appears on the TV screen
when the System detects Audio files on the loaded disc or
connected USB mass storage class device. (For Video files/
JPEG files; it appears when playback is stopped.)
Remote
ONLY
Ex.: While playing an MP3 file on a disc.
Control screen for DVD-VR
The control screen is superimposed on the TV screen when
you call up Original Program (PG) or Play List (PL) screens.
To select playback type
RANDOM
REPEAT STEP Time : 00:00:14
Group : 2 / 3
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
Blue
Red
Green
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
To select the Original
Program:
To select the Play List:
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
Track Information
Title
Rain
Artist
Album
Winter sky.mp3
When Original Program screen is superimposed.
1 Current source
FILE: Current source is “DVD/CD.”
USB: Current source is “USB.”
2 Current group number/total group number
3 Current group
4 Group list
5 Current file
ORIGINAL PROGRAM
No Date
Ch Time
Title
1 04/25/07 4ch
2 05/17/07 8ch 10:30 AM
3 05/22/07 8ch
4 05/26/07 L-1
5 06/20/07 4ch 10:00 PM
7:00 PM JVC DVD World 2004
5:00 PM Music Festival
1:19 PM children 001
6 06/25/07 L-1
8:23 AM children 002
6 File information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV file)
7 Play mode information (RANDOM or PROGRAM.
not applicable for USB mass storage class device.)
8 Repeat Play setting
9 Elapsed playing time of the current file (except
JPEG files)
When Play List screen is superimposed.
PLAY LIST
No Date
Chap Length
Title
My JVC World
0 Operation Status icon
1 05/25/07 001 1:03:16
2 06/17/07 005 1:35:25
3 06/20/07 003 0:10:23
4 06/25/07 001 0:07:19
- Current file number/total number of files in the
current group (total number of files on the current
disc/USB mass storage class device)
= Highlight bar (Current selection)
~ File list
Favorite music
children001-002
• If different types of files (Audio files, Video files and
Still picture files) are recorded on a disc/USB mass
storage class device, select the file type to play (see
page 37).
1 Program/Play list number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of the
recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
To move the highlight bar between group list and file list
(only for AV files and JPEG file):
Moves the bar to the file list.
5 Title of the program/play list*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of play lists
8 Number of chapters
Moves the bar to the group list.
To select an item in the list:
Move the highlight bar to the
desired item.
9 Playback time
*The title of the original program or play list may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.
• If you move the highlight bar
while playing back DVD-VR
or Audio files, the selected item
starts playback automatically.
To remove the control screen, press ENTER/SET.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To start playback
For JPEG files:
To repeat slide-show for JPEG files
While playing or before starting playback...
• When repeating JPEG file on disc:
The selected file (still
picture) is displayed until
you change it.
(
DISC/
(
GROUP/
REPEAT DISC)
REPEAT GROUP)
Canceled
(
ALL/
(
OFF)
Slide-show playback
starts.
Each file (still picture) is
shown on the screen for a
few seconds, then changes
one after another.
REPEAT ALL)
• When repeating JPEG files in a USB mass storage class
device:
(
GROUP/
(
ALL/
REPEAT GROUP)
REPEAT ALL)
Canceled
For the other files:
(
OFF)
Playback starts with the
selected chapter/file.
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 or
USB MEMORY 3 also
starts playback.
To repeat play for Video files
While playing or before starting playback...
• When repeating Video files on disc:
(
TRACK)
(
GROUP)
(
DISC)
REPEAT TRACK REPEAT GROUP REPEAT DISC
• Once you start viewing a JPEG file or Video file, the
control screen disappears.
• To cancel slide-show for JPEG file, and display the current
still picture, press 8.
Canceled
(
ALL)
(
OFF)
REPEAT ALL
• When repeating Video files in a USB mass storage class
device:
To stop playback
(
TRACK)
(
GROUP)
REPEAT TRACK
REPEAT GROUP
Canceled
(
ALL)
(
OFF)
REPEAT ALL
P 1
P
P 1 DISC
P ALL
Repeats the current file.
To repeat chapter/program/play list for DVD-VR
While playing or before starting playback...
For Original Program
Repeats the current group.
Repeats all files on the current disc.
Repeats all files in the USB mass storage
class device.
(
DISC)
(
PG)
(
CHAP)
P ALL DISC Repeats all loaded discs.
Canceled
(
OFF)
(
ALL)
• For Repeat Play of Audio file, see page 22.
To zoom in the JPEG/ASF file
While playing...
For Play List
• During slide-show for JPEG file, press 8 to display the still
picture, then...
(
PL)
(
CHAP)
Canceled
(
OFF)
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current program/play list.
(
ALL)
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
P 1*
P*
ZOOM OFF
P 1 DISC* Repeats all programs on the current disc.
(while holding...)
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
• You can move the zoomed-in area by pressing
P ALL
Repeats all loaded discs.
,
,
,
.
DISC
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly until “ZOOM
*Not available before starting playback.
OFF” appears on the TV screen.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Operations
Recording onto a Tape
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
Main unit
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 12.
1 Insert a recordable cassette into deck B.
Push
Insert
Close
USB
MEMORY
TAPE-B
TAPE-A
Deck A
DISC 1-5
DUBBING
USB/DISC
REC START
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
REC
START/STOP
REVERSE
MODE
Tape direction indicator
Reverse Mode indicator
Deck B
Current source
To change the direction
(forward)
3
2
(reverse)
IMPORTANT:
It should be noted that it may be unlawful to rerecord
pre-recorded tapes, records, or discs without the
consent of the owner of copyright in the sound or
video recording, broadcast or cable program and in
any literary, dramatic, musical, or artistic work
embodied therein.
Change the Reverse Mode if necessary
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start
(
)
recording in the forward (3) direction.
To record on only one side.
3 Start playing the source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “DVD/CD,” “USB,” “TAPE-A” or
“AUX.”
• When recording from a disc/USB mass storage class
device, you can also use “Synchronized Recording”
(see page 30).
• When recording from deck A, you can also use
“Dubbing” (see “Dubbing Tapes” on page 30).
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Start recording.
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
• See step 2 of “Recording onto a Tape” on page 29.
3 Select the source you want to record.
When recording from the disc:
To stop recording
• Select the disc number you want to start recording from.
or
Dubbing Tapes
Main Unit
ONLY
When recording from the USB mass storage class device:
You can record a tape from deck A to deck B.
1 Change the source to “TAPE.”
For recording desired tracks/files from discs:
You can program tracks/files to record in your preferred
order.
Select Program Play (and make a program; see page 20)
before starting playback.
2 Insert the source cassette in deck A, and a recordable
cassette in deck B.
3 Check the tape running direction on the display.
See step 2 of “Recording onto a Tape” on page 29.
4 Start dubbing.
4 Start recording.
Playback and recording start from the
first track/file.
• The System automatically creates
4-second blank between the tunes
recorded on the tapes.
• When either playback or recording ends, both playback
and recording stop at the same time.
• When either tape playback or recording ends, both cassette
decks stop at the same time.
To stop dubbing
To record only your favorite track/file
—One Track Recording
You can specify track/file to record on the tape while
listening to a disc/USB mass storage class device.
• This function is available only for CD/VCD/SVCD and
Audio files (without PBC for SVCD/VCD).
• Not available with Program Play and Random Play.
Synchronized Recording
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
While the track/file you want to record is playing...
Playback returns to the beginning of
that track/file and the track/file is
You can start and stop both playback and tape recording at
the same time.
• This function is available only for CD/VCD/SVCD/DVD
Video and Audio files.
recorded on the tape. After recording,
both playback and recording stop.
• Not available with Random Play.
To cancel while recording
1 Load a disc or connect a USB mass storage class
device and insert a recordable cassette.
or
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Karaoke
IMPORTANT
Remote control
• Always set MIC LEVEL to “0” when connecting or
disconnecting the microphone.
• MIC LEVEL adjustment is valid for both microphones
connected to the MIC 1 and MIC 2 jacks.
• MIC LEVEL and MICVOL mentioned in this Instruction
Book carry the same meaning.
Number
buttons
VOCAL SUPP.
CANCEL
MIC MIX
RESERVE
VOCAL
MASKING
Source
selecting
buttons
KARAOKE SETTING
Singing Along (Karaoke)
You can enjoy singing along (Karaoke) by using one or two
microphones.
• By pressing REC START/STOP, you can record your
singing-along.
KARAOKE SCORING
KARAOKE
,
SETTING
KARAOKE
SETTING
/
/
1 Turn MIC LEVEL to “0”.
+, –
AUDIO VOL
SHIFT
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
3 Start playing a source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “DVD/CD,” “USB,” “TAPE-A,”
“TAPE-B” or “AUX.”
Main unit
• For Karaoke discs: Select a desired audio channel. See
“Selecting the Audio Track” on page 17.
4 Sing into the microphone.
5 Adjust the MIC LEVEL and VOLUME.
KARAOKE
SCORING
VOLUME –,+
To use microphone only, select “DVD/CD” or “USB” in
step 3, but do not start playback.
REC
START/STOP
To cancel the Mic Mixing
MIC LEVEL –,+
MIC MIX
MIC 1
MIC OFF
MIC 2
(Canceled)
(while holding...)
DO NOT keep the microphones
connected while they are not in use.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
Adjusting the Sound Track for Karaoke
Mic Mixing will be activated.
Remote
ONLY
INFO
• If a microphone is already connected and Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to reactivate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
You can adjust the sound track for Karaoke.
For stereo (2-channel) source: By selecting VOCAL
MASK, you can reduce the lead vocal—Vocal Masking.
For Karaoke disc: By selecting L CHANNEL or
R CHANNEL, you can select the audio channel to play.
While Mic Mixing is activated...
3 Activate Karaoke Scoring.
“KSCORE ON” appears on the display.
VOCAL MASK L CHANNEL
(while holding...)
OFF
(Canceled)
R CHANNEL
• During Karaoke Scoring, scoring will start when
playback is started.
(while holding...)
• To cancel Karaoke Scoring before playback, press the same
button again. “KSCORE OFF” appears on the display.
4 Start playback and sing into the microphone.
VOCAL MASK
L CHANNEL
Reduce the vocal from stereo
(2-channel) source.
Karaoke Scoring starts.
• Adjust echo level and key if you want. (See “To apply
an echo to your voice” and “To adjust the key” on
page 33.)
Reproduces only the left audio channel.
R CHANNEL Reproduces only the right audio channel.
To return to normal playback, select “OFF.”
• When you press 4 or ¢, Karaoke Scoring is
canceled and restarts from the selected track/file.
After the song ends, playback stops and the score board
appears on the TV screen with fanfare.
To return to normal playback temporarily
This function allows you to recover the lead vocal
temporarily for your reference.
Ex.:
Your score
KARAOKE SCORE BOARD
While Vocal Masking, L CHANNEL or R CHANNEL is
activated...
85
POINTS
Very good!!
1
2
3
ST
93
85
73
POINTS
POINTS
POINTS
The latest
top 3
ND
RD
The vocal or stereo effect will be restored
temporarily.
• When you press 8, Karaoke Scoring is canceled. When
playback starts again, Karaoke Scoring restarts.
To return to Vocal Masking, L CHANNEL or
R CHANNEL, press the same button again.
• If you do not sing for about 2 minutes after Karaoke
Scoring starts, Karaoke Scoring is canceled.
If you sing a song too quietly for the System to detect your
voice for about 2 minutes after Karaoke Scoring starts,
Karaoke Scoring may be canceled.
• To obtain a correct scoring result, it is recommended to
sing the song completely. If the singing time is less than 3
minutes, the scoring result may be “0” or incorrect.
To stop the playback in the middle of the song, press 7.
Karaoke Scoring is not canceled and your singing along is
scored until that time.
To activate Karaoke Scoring in the middle of the song,
press KARAOKE SCORING. “SCORING” and “START”
appear on the display, then scoring starts from that point.
To deactivate Karaoke Scoring in the same song during
playback, press KARAOKE SCORING. “SCORING” and
“CANCEL” appear on the display.
• Once you deactivate Karaoke Scoring in the same song
during playback, pressing KARAOKE SCORING
switches “KSCORE ON” and “KSCORE OFF”
alternately.
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill
INFO
This System can score your Karaoke skill by comparing your
singing along with the vocal on the playback source.
• This function is available only for disc/USB mass storage
class device playback.
• It is recommended to select the soundtrack as follows (see
page 17):
For Karaoke DVD Video: Select a sound track with vocal.
For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: Select “ST,” “ST1” or “ST2.”
• After selecting a sound track, select VOCAL MASK,
L CHANNEL or R CHANNEL using the VOCAL
MASKING button (see above).
1 Select “DVD/CD” or “USB” as the source.
or
• When you reactivate Karaoke Scoring in the same song
during playback and “KSCORE ON” is selected, scoring
starts from the next track.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To change the scoring level
Changing the Karaoke Setting
You can change five settings for Karaoke.
• To escape from Karaoke setting, wait for several seconds
after the setting is done.
You can change the scoring level of Karaoke Scoring.
• This function is available only for disc/USB mass storage
class device playback.
To apply an echo to your voice
1 Select “DVD/CD” or “USB” as the source.
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
1
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON*
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
• If a microphone is already connected and Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to reactivate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
*
FANFARE*
SCORE LVL
*Appears only when “DVD/CD” or “USB” is selected as
the source with Mic Mixing activated.
3
2 Adjust the echo level.
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON
FANFARE
SCORE LVL
4 Select the scoring level setting.
ECHO OFF
(Canceled)
ECHO 1
ECHO 5 ECHO 4
ECHO 2
ECHO 3
PRO
ECHO 6
AMATEUR
• As the number increases, echo level also increases.
Remote
ONLY
To adjust the key
PRO
Scoring level is strict.
• This function is available for disc/USB mass storage class
device playback.
AMATEUR
Scoring level is lenient.
• This function is available only for CD/VCD/SVCD/DVD
Video and Audio files.
• Key adjustment will be canceled when you deactivate Mic
Mixing, or select another disc, track or file.
Remote
ONLY
To turn on/off the fanfare
You can turn the fanfare on or off for Karaoke Scoring.
• This function is available only for disc/USB mass storage
class device playback.
1 Select “DVD/CD” or “USB” as the source.
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
1
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
• If a microphone is already connected and Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to reactivate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON
FANFARE
SCORE LVL
3 Start playback, then...
2 Select the fanfare setting.
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON
FANFARE
SCORE LVL
ON
4 Adjust the key.
OFF
(Canceled)
To raise the key (up to +6).
To lower the key (up to –6).
To return to normal key, select “0.”
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Select songs you want for Karaoke Program Play.
Press the number buttons to select a song in the following
order.
To change the mic volume
Remote
ONLY
1
1 Select a disc.
2 Select a title/group.
3 Select a chapter/track/file.
MICVOL
ECHO
KEYCON*
FANFARE*
SCORE LVL
*
• To select a number, see
“How to select a number”
on page 8.
*Appears only when “DVD/CD” or “USB” is selected as
the source with Mic Mixing activated.
• To cancel the procedure,
press RESERVE while
holding SHIFT. The
PROGRAM indicator
disappears.
2 Select the volume level.
6 Start playback.
• The mic volume level can be adjusted in 16 steps
(MICVOL 0 – 15).
Reserving Karaoke Songs
Karaoke Reserve screen disappears and playback starts in
the order you have programmed.
• For the Karaoke Program Play with Karaoke
Scoring: Each time the song ends, playback stops and
the score board appears. Press DVD/CD 3 to start
playback of the next track.
—Karaoke Program Play
You can determine the playback order of the titles, chapters,
tracks or files on the disc player. You can program up to 12
steps.
• This function is not available for files in a USB mass
storage class device.
INFO
7 Sing into the microphone.
8 Adjust the MIC LEVEL and VOLUME.
1
Select “DVD/CD” as the source.
To check the programmed contents
2 Turn the MIC LEVEL to “0”.
(while holding...)
3 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC1 or MIC2 jack.
Karaoke Reserve screen appears.
• You cannot display Karaoke Reserve screen while
Karaoke Scoring is in use.
To modify the program
While Karaoke Reserve screen is shown on the TV...
Mic Mixing will be automatically activated.
• If a microphone is already connected and Mic Mixing is
not activated, use the MIC MIX button to reactivate Mic
Mixing (see page 31).
4 Activate Karaoke Program Play.
To erase the unwanted step:
No Disc Gr/Tt Tr/Chap
1
2
3
4
5
(while holding...)
On the TV screen
(while holding...)
• The PROGRAM indicator flashes during this mode.
To erase the entire program, repeat the procedure.
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 5.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations
1 Select one of the timer setting modes—ON for
Recording Timer or Daily Timer.
Remote control
Recording Timer
Daily Timer
ON
REC TIMER
Canceled
DAILYTIMER
Clock setting
ON
(while holding...)
AUDIO
CLOCK/TIMER
SLEEP
CANCEL
2 Make the timer setting as you want.
, ,
ENTER/SET
Repeat the procedure for the following setting until
finished.
1
2
3
Set the hour then minute for on-time.
Set the hour then minute for off-time.
For Recording Timer: Select the playback
source—“TUNER-FM,” “TUNER-AM” or
“AUX.”
SHIFT
For Daily Timer: Select the playback source—
“TUNER-FM,” “TUNER-AM,” “DISC,” “USB,”
“TAPE-A,” “TAPE-B” or “AUX.”
EX.: When “TUNER-FM” is selected.
• When you select “AUX” as the source, you also
need to set the timer of the external component.
Select an item you want to play or record as
follows.
“TUNER-FM” and “TUNER-AM”: Preset station.
“DISC”: Disc, group/title and track/file/chapter.
“USB”: Group and file.
4
5
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Timer
INFO
Select the volume level.
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite
song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can
make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You cannot activate Daily Timer and Recording Timer at
the same time. (Activating either timer deactivates the
other timer.)
• You can select the volume level (“VOLUME 0” –
“VOLUME 30” and “VOLUME --”). If you select
“VOLUME --,” the volume is set to the last level
when the System has been turned off.
After making the timer setting, “SET OK” appears and your
setting items appear on the display one after another.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL
while holding SHIFT. You can return to the previous step.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Turn off the System (on standby) if you have set the
To turn on the timer again, repeat step 1 and press
ENTER/SET in step 2.
timer with the System turned on.
Remote
ONLY
Turning Off the Power Automatically
With Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep while listening to
music.
How Recording Timer works
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
When Recording Timer has been set, the timer indicator
(
) and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
10 20 30 60 90
Recording Timer works only once.
• Recording Timer starts working only when the System
is turned off (on standby).
Canceled
180 150 120
(while holding...)
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station, sets
the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.
2 Wait until the set time disappears.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
When the off-time comes
The System stops recording, and turns off (on standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
• If you press the button
repeatedly, you can change
the shut-off time.
How Daily Timer works
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer indicator
(while holding...)
(
) and DAILY indicator are lit on the display. Daily
Timer is activated at the same time everyday until the
timer is turned off manually (see below).
• Daily Timer starts working only when the System is
turned off (on standby).
Timer Priority
If Timer settings overlap, the timers work as described
below.
When the on-time comes
• Sleep Timer has priority over the Recording Timer and
Daily Timer.
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or
starts playing the specified source, and sets the volume
level gradually to the preset level after about 30 seconds.
Canceled
When the off-time comes
The System stops playback, and turns off (standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
Sleep Timer
To turn off the Timer after the setting is done
You can turn off the timer after it has been set.
The System turns off.
• Since Daily Timer works at the same time everyday, you
may need to cancel it on some particular days.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer does not work.
1 Select the timer (REC TIMER or DAILYTIMER)
Recording/Playback
Canceled
you want to cancel.
DAILY Timer
Recording Timer
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
ON
REC TIMER
Canceled
DAILYTIMER
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
Clock setting
ON
(while holding...)
Sleep Timer
2 Turn off the selected timer.
The System turns off.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer is canceled. (If
Sleep Timer shuts off the System earlier than the off time
you have set for Recording Timer, recording stops when
Sleep Timer shuts off the System.)
(while holding...)
• The timer indicator (
) goes off.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Operations
Basic Procedure
Remote Control
You can change the setting of the System.
• The setup menu can be used only when “DVD/CD” or
“USB” is selected as the source.
1 Press SET UP while playback is stopped.
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
, , , ,
ENTER/SET
SET UP
2 Press (or ) to select the menu.
3 Press (or ) to select the item.
4 Press ENTER/SET.
5 Press (or ) to select the options, then press
ENTER/SET.
To erase a preference display, press SET UP.
LANGUAGE menu
Item
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
Contents
You can select the initial menu language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select the initial audio language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select the initial subtitle language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select “ENGLISH,” “SPANISH,” or “FRENCH” as the on-screen language.
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
PICTURE menu
Item
Contents
MONITOR TYPE
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play back picture recorded for wide-
screen televisions.
16:9
4:3 LB
16:9 NORMAL (Wide television screen): Select this when the aspect ratio of your wide TV is fixed
to 16:9.
16:9 AUTO (Wide television screen): Select this when your TV is an ordinary wide TV.
4:3 LB (Letter Box conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. Displays a wide-screen picture to fit
the width of the TV screen keeping the aspect ratio.
4:3 PS
4:3 PS (Pan Scan conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. The picture is zoomed in to fill the screen
vertically and the left and right sides of the picture are cut off.
PICTURE SOURCE
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting the type of the video source.
AUTO: Normally, select this option. The System recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of
the current picture according to its information.
FILM: For a film source picture.
VIDEO: For a video source picture.
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
You can set the screen saver function to ON or OFF.
ON: The on-screen display becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.
OFF: To cancel the screen saver.
You can select a file type to play.
AUDIO: To play Audio files. (MP3/WMA/WAV files.)
STILL PICTURE: To play Still Picture files. (JPEG file.)
VIDEO: To play Video files. (MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF files.)
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO menu
Item
Contents
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
Set this item correctly when using the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal on the rear.
PCM ONLY: When connecting to audio equipment which is compatible with only linear PCM
signals.
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM: When connecting to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with built-in
Dolby Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: When connecting to a DTS/MPEG Audio decoder or an amplifier with built-in
DTS/MPEG Audio decoder.
DOWN MIX
This setting is effective for digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM
ONLY.”
DOLBY SURROUND: Select this when connecting a surround decoder.
STEREO: Select this when connecting a stereo receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level while playing Dolby Digital software.
AUTO: Select to apply the compression only to multi-channel encoded audio (except for 1-channel
and 2-channel sources.)
ON: Select this to always apply the compression.
OTHERS menu
Item
Contents
RESUME
You can select Resume.
ON: The System resumes playback from the position where playback has been stopped (not applicable
for CD).
OFF: Resume is deactivated.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
Activate or deactivate the on-screen guide.
ON: Activate the on-screen guide.
OFF: Deactivate the on-screen guide.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the TV
You can operate JVC’s TV using the remote control supplied
for this System.
Remote control
To turn on or To select the input mode (either TV or
off the TV:
VIDEO):
TV
TV/VIDEO
(while holding...)
To adjust TV volume:
(while holding...)
TV CH +,–
SHIFT
TV VOL +,–
To select the TV channel:
(while holding...)
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
– You can play back the following types of files in a USB
mass storage class device (maximum data transfer rate:
2 Mbps):
– Audio: MP3, WMA, WAV
– Still picture: JPEG
– Video: MPEG-1, MPEG-2, ASF
– This System may not play back some files even though
their formats are listed above.
– You cannot play back a file larger than 2 Gigabyte.
– When playing a file which has a high transfer rate, frames
or sounds may be dropped during playback.
– This System cannot recognize a USB mass storage class
device whose rating is other than 5 V and exceeds
500 mA.
Learning More about This System
Connections (see pages 3 to 6)
Changing the Color System:
• If you play back an NTSC disc/file with the color system
set to “PAL,” the disc/file will be reproduced using “PAL
60” format; however, if the TV does not support this
format, the screen may not display properly.
• If you play back a PAL disc/file with the color system set
to “NTSC,” you can watch the playback pictures, but the
following symptoms may occur:
– The items on the menu will be blurred, and be shown
slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the
original aspect ratio.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
– This System may not play back some USB mass storage
class devices and does not support DRM (Digital Rights
Management).
– It will take some time to start up a Digital Audio Player
(DAP) larger than 1 Gigabyte.
– You cannot send any data to your USB mass storage
class device from this System.
Daily Operations—Playback (see pages 8 to 12)
Listening to the Radio:
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number,
the previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the preset stations may be erased in a few days. If
this happens, preset the stations again.
Playing Back a Disc/USB Mass Storage Class Device:
• When you change the source to “DVD/CD” or “USB,” it
may take a while to activate the source.
• While the System is reading a disc, the source may not
change to “USB” correctly. In this case, press 7, then
reactivate “USB” as the source.
• On some discs/files, the actual operations may be different
from what is explained in this manual, due to the
programming and disc structure; such differences are not a
malfunction of this System.
• For playback of files in the USB mass storage class
device...
– When connecting a USB mass storage class device, refer
also to its manual.
– Connect one USB mass storage class device to the
System at a time. Do not use a USB hub.
– You cannot charge any other USB device through the
(USB MEMORY) terminal of this System.
• For MP3/WMA/WAV playback...
– MP3/WMA/WAV discs require a longer readout time
than regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the
group/file configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA/WAV files cannot be played back and
will be skipped. This results from their recording
processes and conditions.
– When making MP3/WMA/WAV discs, use ISO 9660
Level 1 or Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA/WAV files with
the extension code <.mp3>, <.wma> or <.wav>
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you make each MP3/WMA/
WAV files at the following conditions:
– MP3/WMA: At a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and bit
rate of 128 kbps.
– WAV: 44.1 kHz/16 bit Linear PCM.
– This System cannot play back files made at bit rate of
less than 64 kbps.
• For DVD-VR playback...
–
Original Program: The System can play back the
original picture in the recorded order.
– While playing back a file in a USB mass storage class
device, do not disconnect the device. It may cause a
malfunction of both the System and the device.
– JVC bears no responsibility for any loss of data in the
USB mass storage class device while using this System.
– When connecting with a USB cable, use the cable whose
length is less than 1 m (3.3 ft).
–
Play List: The System can play back the play list edited
by the recording equipment.
– For details about DVD-VR format and play list, refer to
the manual of the recording equipment.
– This System is compatible with USB 2.0 Full Speed.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For JPEG playback...
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
(see pages 13 to 16)
Reinforcing the Bass Sound:
• You cannot adjust the Active Bass level when the
headphones are connected.
Applying an Optimal Bass Sound Effect—VARIO
BASS:
– This System can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg> or <.jpeg> (regardless of the letter case—
upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of
more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be
shown.)
• If you plug in a microphone and Mic Mixing is activated,
the System will automatically switches the mode to
LITE.n.EASY even if the mode is set to OFF.
Creating Your Own Sound Modes —User Mode:
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the User Mode settings may be erased in a few
days. If this happens, set the User Modes again.
Creating 3-dimensional Sound Field—3D Phonic:
• While you use the headphones, 3D Phonic is canceled
temporarily.
– 3D Phonic is also applied to the optical digital output
signals through the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT
terminal.
Setting the Clock:
• “AM 12:00” will flash on the display until you set the
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files*.
Progressive JPEG files* or lossless JPEG files* cannot
be played.
* Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras,
web, etc.
Progressive JPEG format:Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used
now.
• For MPEG-1/MPEG-2 playback...
– This System can play back MPEG-1/MPEG-2 files with
the extension code <.mpg> or <.mpeg> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
– The stream format should conform to MPEG system/
program stream.
– 720 x 576 pixels (25 fps)/720 x 480 pixels (30 fps) is
recommended for the highest resolution.
– This System also supports the resolutions of 352 x 576/
480 x 576/352 x 288 pixels (25 fps) and 352 x 480/480 x
480/352 x 240 pixels (30 fps).
clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this
happens, reset the clock.
Unique Video Disc/File Operations (see pages 17
to 19)
Selecting the Audio Track:
• On some disc/file, you cannot change audio languages
while playing back.
Special Picture Playback:
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be
reproduced.
– The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at
Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple profile at Main Level)/
MP@LL (Main Profile at Low Level).
– Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio
Layer-2 or MPEG2 Audio Layer-2.
• For ASF playback...
– This System can play back ASF files with the extension
code <.asf> (regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– This System supports ASF files whose resolution is
352 x 288 pixels or less.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
– Some recorded files may not be able to played back
depending on file characteristics, kind of digital still/
video cameras, or recording conditions.
Advanced Playback Operations (see pages 20
to 22)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
• While programming steps...
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an
item number that does not exist on the disc (for example,
selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).
• For SVCD/VCD/CD loaded on the other tray than the
current one, the System may prompt for the group number
entry as well; however, these entries will be ignored during
playback.
• The programmed contents will remain until you erase it.
• While the PROGRAM indicator is on, you cannot change
the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control and
DISC 1 – 5 # on the main unit do not work.)
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• While the System is turned off, connecting a microphone
does not activate Mic Mixing and any other Karaoke
related function. In this case, press MIC MIX while
holding SHIFT after turning the System on.
Adjusting the Sound Track for Karaoke:
• The Vocal Masking setting is not applied to the optical
digital output signals through the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal.
On-Screen Operations (see pages 23 to 28)
Operations Using the On-screen Bar:
• A-B Repeat is possible only within the same title or within
the same track.
Recording Operations (see pages 29 to 30)
General:
• You cannot change the source during recording.
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the
start and the end of cassette tapes. Thus, before recording,
wind the leader tape first to ensure that the recording will
be made without any music part lost.
• If no cassette is inserted or a protected tape has been
inserted, “NO REC” appears on the display.
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus,
you can make sound adjustments. without affecting the
recording level.
• On some music, Vocal Masking does not provide the
correct effect.
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill:
• You can also activate Karaoke Scoring while playing back.
In this case, the scoring starts from that point.
But cancel Karaoke Scoring and set Karaoke Scoring again
in the same track during the playback, scoring starts from
next track.
• While Karaoke Scoring is in use, you cannot deactivate
Mic Mixing or use MIC MIX, RESERVE and number
buttons.
• Activating Karaoke Scoring cancels Repeat Play.
• You cannot use Karaoke Scoring during Program Play,
Random Play, or recording. However, you can turn
Karaoke Scoring on and off by using
KARAOKE SCORING button during these play modes.
• The ranking (top 3) is cleared when you turn off the
System.
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play:
• You can use RESERVE button when a microphone is
plugged in. However, you can cancel Karaoke Program
Play using the button even if a microphone is not plugged
in. In case you reactivate Karaoke Program Play, plug in a
microphone.
• If you have selected a disc tray on which a disc containing
Video files or JPEG file or DVD-VR is loaded, that disc
number is skipped.
• If DVD-VR or a disc containing Video files and JPEG file
is loaded on the current tray, you cannot activate Karaoke
Program Play.
• When the track starts playback, that track number will be
erased from the Karaoke Reserve screen (the programmed
contents will remain until you erase it).
Recording onto a Tape:
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in
the forward (3) direction first; otherwise, recording will
stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
• While recording onto a tape using USB/DISC REC
START button, plugging in or out headphones may cause
sound distortion and affect the recording.
Synchronized Recording:
• You cannot open the disc tray while recording onto a tape
using USB/DISC REC START button.
• Recording starts from the first track even if you have
selected a track by using 4/¢. To specify track(s) to
record, program them (not applicable for USB mass
storage class device) or use One Track Recording.
• While recording, you cannot use disc/USB mass storage
class device operation buttons (except for 7).
• You cannot use Repeat Play during synchronized
recording (Repeat Play will be canceled).
• USB/DISC REC START button does not work:
– While playback is paused.
– When Random Play mode is selected.
– When playing back in Program Play mode.
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction (3)
during recording, the last song will be re-recorded at the
beginning of the reverse side (2).
• When the tape reaches its end in the reverse side (2)
during recording, recording stops even though the disc/
USB mass storage class device is not entirely recorded.
• While the PROGRAM indicator is flashing, you cannot
change the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control
and DISC 1 – 5 # on the main unit do not work.)
• For some VCD, the Karaoke Scoring result may not appear
at the end of the track if PBC is activated. In this case, press
7 to view your scoring result.
Enjoying Karaoke (see pages 31 to 34)
General:
• While recording onto a tape, Key adjustment, Echo and
Vocal Masking will be recorded. However, while
recording onto a tape using USB/DISC REC START, Key
adjustment will not be recorded.
• While the System is turned on, connecting a microphone
automatically activates Mic Mixing and all the Karaoke
related functions.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations (see pages 35 to 36)
Setting the Timer:
Handling cassette tapes
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by
inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in
the cassette.
• If you do not specify the preset station or track number
correctly while setting a timer, the currently selected
station or the first track will be played when timer is
activated.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the
clock first, then the timer again.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty
places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or
speaker, or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality:
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the
heads, capstans and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and
audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System is
turned off).
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the
source while Recording Timer is recording.
• Daily Timer will not work correctly for some DVDs.
Setup Menu Operations (see pages 37 to 38)
General:
• If the upper and lower parts of the menu are cut off, adjust
the picture size control of the TV.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back
to protect from unexpected erasure or re-
recording.
To protect your recording, remove these
tabs.
LANGUAGE menu:
• When the language you have selected for MENU
LANGUAGE, AUDIO LANGUAGE, or SUBTITLE is
not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the
initial language.
PICTURE menu—MONITOR TYPE:
• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become
4:3 letter box with some disc. This depends on how they
are recorded.
To re-record on a protected tape, cover
the holes with adhesive tape.
• When you select “16:9 NORMAL” or “16:9 AUTO” for a
picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly
changes due to the process for converting the picture width.
OTHERS menu—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• The setup menu and on-screen bar will be displayed (and
recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zoom-in always appear on
the display regardless of this setting.
Cleaning the System
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System
is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean
with a dry cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become
damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the
following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
– DO NOT wipe it forcefully.
Maintenance
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as
insecticides to it.
– DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact
for a long time.
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs,
tapes and mechanism clean.
Handling discs
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at the edge
while pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc when
placing it back in its case.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, extreme temperatures,
and moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list
for a possible solution before calling for service.
] The disc is scratched or dirty.
The playback sounds strange.
] Cancel Vocal Masking (see page 32).
] Cancel Key adjustment (see page 33).
No subtitle appears on the TV screen though you have
selected the initial subtitle language.
] Some discs are programmed to always display no
subtitle initially. If this happens, press SUB TITLE after
starting play (see page 18).
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before
you finish.
] There is a time limit. Repeat procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
] The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to
external electrical interference. Unplug the AC power
cord and then plug it back in.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
] The path between the remote control and the remote
sensor on the System is blocked.
Audio language is different from the one you have
selected as the initial audio language.
] Some discs/files are programmed to always use the
original language initially. If this happens, press AUDIO/
MPX after starting play (see page 17).
The disc tray does not open or close.
] The AC power cord is not plugged in.
] Child Lock is in use. “LOCKED” appears on the display
window (see page 22).
] The batteries are exhausted.
No sound is heard.
] Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
] Program Play is in use. Cancel Program Play (see
] Headphones are connected.
page 21).
No picture appears on the screen.
] The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV screen, the picture is
blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.
] Incorrect color system is selected (see page 6).
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the
screen.
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
] Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off
while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
Recording Operations:
“CANNOT REC” appears on the display.
] The System cannot perform recording.
Impossible to record.
] Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed.
Cover the holes with adhesive tape.
] Karaoke Scoring is in use. Cancel the Karaoke Scoring
(see page 32).
] Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 37).
Radio Operations:
Hard to hear broadcasts because of noise.
] Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
] The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
] The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Disc/file Operations:
The disc does not play.
] You have inserted a DVD Video whose Region Code is
not “1.” (“REGION ERR” appears on the display.)
] The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the
label side up.
Karaoke Operations:
Karaoke function cannot be activated.
] Ensure at least 1 microphone is connected and Mic
Mixing is activated. If a microphone is not connected,
you cannot activate Mic Mixing and any other Karaoke
related function.
Karaoke Scoring function cannot be activated.
] You cannot use Karaoke Scoring while recording, or
while the disc menu for DVD Video/SVCD/VCD is
shown on the TV screen.
Scoring result seems wrong (or “– –” appears).
] The time of the playback and singing along are too short
for Karaoke Scoring. It is recommended to sing more
than 3 minutes to obtain a correct scoring result.
] No sound from the microphone or the input level (MIC
LEVEL) is too low.
] You have sung too quietly.
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer or Recording Timer does not work.
] The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
ID3 Tag on an MP3 disc cannot be shown.
]
There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
Groups and files are not played back as you expect.
] The playing order is determined when the files were
recorded. It depends on the application.
AV files are not played back.
] The disc or USB mass storage class device includes
different types of files (Audio file, Video file and Still
picture file). In this case, you can play back the files
selected only by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see page 37).
] You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after the
System read the disc or the USB mass storage class
device. In this case, reload the disc or disconnect the
USB mass storage class device and connect it again.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Output Signals
Playback disc/file
DVD Video
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
PCM ONLY
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 96 kHz, Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DVD-R/-RW in DVD-VR format
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
Dolby Digital bitstream
with Dolby Digital
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DTS bitstream
MP3/WMA/WAV/MPEG-1/
MPEG-2 disc/file
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
32 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
ASF disc/file
* While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Code List
AA Afar
FA Persian
FI Finnish
FJ Fiji
FO Faroese
FY Frisian
GA Irish
GD Scots Gaelic
GL Galician
GN Guarani
GU Gujarati
HA Hausa
HI Hindi
KM Cambodian
KN Kannada
KO Korean (KOR)
KS Kashmiri
KU Kurdish
KY Kirghiz
LA Latin
LN Lingala
LO Laothian
LT Lithuanian
LV Latvian, Lettish RW Kinyarwanda
OC Occitan
OM (Afan) Oromo
OR Oriya
SV Swedish
SW Swahili
TA Tamil
TE Telugu
TG Tajik
AB Abkhazian
AF Afrikaans
AM Ameharic
AR Arabic
AS Assamese
AY Aymara
AZ Azerbaijani
BA Bashkir
BE Byelorussian
BG Bulgarian
BH Bihari
PA Panjabi
PS Pashto, Pushto
PT Portuguese
QU Quechua
RM Rhaeto-Romance TK Turkmen
RN Kirundi
TH Thai
TI
Tigrinya
TL Tagalog
TN Setswana
TO Tonga
TR Turkish
TS Tsonga
TT Tatar
TW Twi
UK Ukrainian
UR Urdu
RO Rumanian
MG Malagasy
MI Maori
SA Sanskrit
SD Sindhi
SG Sangho
BI
Bislama
HR Croatian
BN Bengali, Bangla HY Armenian
MK Macedonian
ML Malayalam
MN Mongolian
MO Moldavian
MR Marathi
MS Malay (MAY)
MT Maltese
MY Burmese
NA Nauru
BO Tibetan
BR Breton
CA Catalan
CO Corsican
CY Welsh
DA Danish
DZ Bhutani
EL Greek
IA Interlingua
IE Interlingue
IK Inupiak
SH Serbo-Croatian
SI
Singhalese
SL Slovenian
SM Samoan
SN Shona
SO Somali
SQ Albanian
SR Serbian
SS Siswati
ST Sesotho
SU Sundanese
IN Indonesian
UZ Uzbek
IS
IW Hebrew
JI Yiddish
Icelandic
VI
Vietnamese
VO Volapuk
WO Wolof
XH Xhosa
YO Yoruba
ZU Zulu
JW Javanese
KA Georgian
KK Kazakh
EO Esperanto
ET Estonian
EU Basque
NE Nepali
NL Dutch
NO Norwegian
KL Greenlandic
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Amplifier section—CA-DXJ21
Subwoofer (SP-DXJ21W)
Output Power:
Type:
1-Way Bass-Reflex Type
MAIN SPEAKERS:
(Magnetically Shielded Type)
16.0 cm (6-5/16 inches) cone x 1
105 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 6 Ω at
Speaker:
1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
Power Handling Capacity:120 W
SUBWOOFER: 105 W, min. RMS, driven into
Impedance:
6 Ω
6 Ω at 63 Hz with no more than 10% total
Frequency Range:
Sound Pressure Level:
Dimensions (W × H × D):
45 Hz to 5 000 Hz
88 dB/W
harmonic distortion.
•m
Digital output:
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
(USB MEMORY
Audio input sensitivity/Impedance
205 mm × 370 mm × 236 mm
(8-1/8 inches × 14-5/8 inches × 9-5/16 inches)
3.5 kg (7.8 lbs)
Digital input:
)
Mass:
(Measured at 1 kHz, with tape recording signal 300 mV)
AUX:
MIC1/2:
400 mV/47 kΩ
Main speaker (SP-DXJ21F)
3.0 mV/50 kΩ
Type:
3-Way 3-Speaker Bass-Reflex Type
VIDEO OUT:
Color system:
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO:
(Magnetically Shielded Type)
NTSC/PAL
Speakers:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Y (luminance)
C (chrominance, burst)
NTSC
Main Woofer:
Mid Range:
Tweeter:
16.0 cm (6-5/16 inches) cone × 1
5.0 cm (2 inches) cone × 1
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω
2.0 cm (13/16 inches) dome × 1
PAL
Power Handling Capacity:120 W
Speaker Terminals: 6 Ω − 16 Ω (main speakers/subwoofer)
Impedance:
6 Ω
Tuner section
Frequency Range:
Sound Pressure Level:
Dimensions (W × H × D):
45 Hz to 20 000 Hz
87 dB/W
FM tuning range:
87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz
530 kHz – 1 710 kHz
•m
AM (MW) tuning range:
205 mm × 370 mm × 236 mm
(8-1/8 inches × 14-5/8 inches × 9-5/16 inches)
3.7 kg (8.2 lbs) each
Disc/File player section
Playable disc:
DVD Video/CD/VCD/SVCD
Mass:
CD-R/CD-RW (MP3/WMA/WAV/
JPEG/MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF format)
DVD-R/-RW (DVD-VR/DVD-video/
MP3/WMA/WAV/JPEG/MPEG-1/
MPEG-2/ASF format)
General
Power requirement:
Power consumption:
AC 120 V
155 W
, 60 Hz
+R/+RW (DVD-video/MP3/WMA/
WAV/JPEG/MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF
format)
15 W (on standby)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.):
185 mm x 370 mm x 372 mm
(7-5/16 inches x 14-5/8 inches x 14-11/16 inches)
Mass (approx.): 9.3 kg (20.6 lbs)
DVD-ROM (DVD-video/MP3/WMA/
WAV/JPEG/MPEG-1/MPEG-2/ASF
format)
Playable file:
MP3/WMA/WAV/JPEG/MPEG-1/
MPEG-2/ASF format
Dynamic range:
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
80 dB
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
500 lines
Immeasurable
USB storage section
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
USB specification:
Compatible device:
Compatible file system:
Bus power supply:
Compatible with USB 2.0 Full Speed
Mass storage class
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS 2.0+Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
DTS, Inc.
FAT 16, FAT 32
DC 5 V
500 mA
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Cassette deck section
Frequency response
Normal (type I):
Wow and flutter:
50 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
• USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS
PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGING IN PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITIES.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts Index
Remote control
Button
Page
33, 34
Page
Button
Page
Button
Page
Button
KARAOKE
SETTING + , –
0
#
DISC1–5
DISC1–5
8
^
+
7
%
10, 22,
11, 30
30
USB/DISC
REC START
_
4
30
AUDIO
a
s
w
c
r
e
z
8
8, 36
39
8
TV
DUBBING
USB
MEMORY
8, 10, 28 30, 32
,
7
10, 12, 21, 28, 32 MIC MIX
6
j
k
b
r
y
y
7
3
z
31, 34
11, 27
24 – 26
6
#
#
@#
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
8, 12, 30
8, 12, 29, 30
9
¡
¢
8
1
4
,
9, 11, 12
11, 21
MENU/PL
VARIO BASS
VOLUME
=
!
13
,
ON SCREEN
NTSC/PAL
PREV., NEXT
TUNING +,– § ¶
8, 9, 31
10, 19, 21
18
12
,
,
,
6, 9, 11, 14 –16, REPEAT
22, 28
22
Remote control
1
,
18, 21, 24 – 28,
34, 35, 37
REPEAT A-B
RESERVE
ENTER/SET
34
Number
buttons
1
8, 9, 11, 12, 20, RETURN
26, 34
12
a
REVERSE
12, 29
2
3
4
3D PHONIC
i
m
15
13
MODE
SET UP
SHIFT
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
s
d
ACTIVE
9
o
37
6
BASS EXT
LEVEL + , –
9, 11 – 13, 15,
16, 18, 19, 21,
22, 28, 31, 32,
34 – 36, 39
f
9
7
g
h
ANGLE
t
t
n
u
5
d
18
5
6
7
10
10
AUDIO/MPX
AUDIO VOL+,–
BALANCE L-R
CANCEL
17
8, 9, 31
13
SLEEP
4
c
u
v
l
/
7
m
n
f
p
36
j
SLOW
9
,
(
19
8
9
p
q
w
e
21, 34, 36
16, 35, 36
SOUND MODE
14
k
l
/
z
x
CLOCK/
TIMER
SUB TITLE
18
3
2 3
TAPE A
TAPE B
8, 12
8, 12
11, 27
39
DIMMER
DISC 1–5
DISPLAY
g
2
k
q
16
11
16
TOP MENU/PG
TV CH + , –
r
t
y
u
c
v
3
DVD/CD
8, 10, 20, 21, TV VOL + , –
28, 32, 34
39
b
n
TV/VIDEO
39
DVD LEVEL
;
b
15
9
USB
MEMORY
8, 10, 28
,
32
3
FADE
MUTING
i
o
;
m
VOCAL
MASKING
9
f
32
FM/AM/AUX
x
e
8, 9
FM/PLAY
MODE
9, 20, 21
VOCAL
SUPP.
32
GROUP/
TITLE
r
j
h
11
VARIO BASS
VFP
;
b
v
13
15
KARAOKE
SCORING
32
ZOOM
19, 28
Main unit
KARAOKE
SETTING
33, 34
Main unit
Button
Page
8, 36
7
Button
Page
2
3
∞
Disc trays
1
5
10
#
Display
DVD/CD
8, 10, 28, 32,
34
7
10, 12, 21, 22,
28 – 30, 32
FM/AM/AUX
@
~
8, 9
32
¡
¢
8
1
4
,
§ ¶ 9, 11, 12, 19
£ ¢ 11, 21
KARAOKE
SCORING
,
6
*
10, 19, 21
6, 10
MIC 1, MIC 2
MIC LEVEL
PHONES
-
0
(
31 – 34
(USB
memory)
terminal
31, 34
8
9
PRESET +, – £ ¢
0
3D-PHONIC
™
15
PUSH OPEN
9 & 12, 29
ACTIVE
BASS EX. +,–
# $ 13
REVERSE
MODE
¡
12, 29
DEMO
∞
6
REC START/
STOP
)
30
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EN
0408WMKMDWJMM
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Invacare Marine Safety Devices ACC140 User Manual
Invacare Mobility Aid 1038599 User Manual
JVC Speaker System CA UXE15 User Manual
JVC Speaker System SP F303C User Manual
JVC Stereo System VS DT2000R User Manual
Kathrein Air Compressor HDS 150 User Manual
Kenwood Microcassette Recorder DX 7 User Manual
KitchenAid Cooktop KECC507GAL3 User Manual
Klipsch Speaker HS1 User Manual
Kramer Electronics Wheelchair N 2900 300125 Rev 2 User Manual